Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 182
1 of 182

Summary of Content for Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual PDF

Wed like to take a moment to thank you for purchasing the Roland Percussion Sound Module TD-10.

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (p. 2), USING THE UNIT SAFELY (p. 3, 4), and IMPORTANT NOTES (p. 17). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, this manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.

Copyright 1997 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

Read all the instructions before using the product. Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, or the like. This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. The product should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. The product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat. The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

A. B.

C. D.

E.

The power-supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings. The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:

The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or The product has been exposed to rain; or The product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or The product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.

Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or breakdown, grounding provides a path of least resistance for

electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be

plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.

DANGER: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the product if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.

For the USA

The product which is equipped with a THREE WIRE GROUNDING TYPE LINE PLUG must be grounded.

WARNING: IMPORTANT:

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE

For the U.K.

2

Before using this unit, make sure to read the instruc- tions below, and the Owners Manual.

...........................................................................................................

Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit. (The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user- installable options; see p. 43.)

...........................................................................................................

When using the unit with a rack or stand recom- mended by Roland, the rack or stand must be care- fully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. If not using a rack or stand, you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly sup- port the unit, and keep it from wobbling.

...........................................................................................................

Use only the attached power-supply cord.

...........................................................................................................

Avoid damaging the power cord. Do not bend it excessively, step on it, place heavy objects on it, etc. A damaged cord can easily become a shock or fire hazard. Never use a power cord after it has been damaged.

...........................................................................................................

In households with small children, an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of fol- lowing all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit.

...........................................................................................................

Protect the unit from strong impact. (Do not drop it!)

...........................................................................................................

Do not force the units power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cordsthe total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cords outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insula- tion on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through.

...........................................................................................................

Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your dealer, or qualified Roland service per- sonnel.

...........................................................................................................

Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board (WAVE & SYSTEM EXPANSION BOARD TDW series; p. 43).

...........................................................................................................

Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of insecti- cides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.

...........................................................................................................

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

3

Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly.

* Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.

Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly.

The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power- cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled.

Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.

...........................................................................................................

Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children.

...........................................................................................................

Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.

...........................................................................................................

Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.

...........................................................................................................

Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices.

...........................................................................................................

Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 27).

...........................................................................................................

Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet.

...........................................................................................................

Install only the specified circuit board(s) (WAVE & SYSTEM EXPANSION BOARD TDW series). Remove only the specified screws (p. 43).

...........................................................................................................

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

4

This owners manual is organized as follows.

Quick Start This section is intended for those using the TD-10 for the first time, and explains how to use various functions in a simple way. Please read Quick Start and follow along by actually operating the TD- 10. This will help you understand most of what you need to know for basic operations. If you find unfamiliar words or terms, refer to the Glossary on p. 169. More advanced ways of using the TD- 10, or details of other operations are explained the Reference section.

Advanced Use This section explains all functions of the TD-10 in detail and is divided into specific parts. Basic panel operations and displays are covered in the Quick Start. The Advanced Use section assumes you already understand basic procedures, so if anythings unclear, refer to the Quick Start.

Chapter 1. Overview of the TD-10 V-drums This chapter explains the concept of the TD-10 and how it is organized. Read this chapter in order to understand what the TD-10 is.

Chapters 25. Functions for creating sound If you wish to learn more about the sound creation possibilities introduced in the Quick Start, refer to chapters 25.

Chapter 6. Using a sequencer and related functions This chapter explains sequencer functions such as performance, recording, click settings, and pattern editing.

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10 This chapter explains settings that affect the entire TD-10, such as adjusting the overall sound, sav- ing data to a memory card etc.

Chapters 8 and 9. Convenient functions and how to use them These chapters explain how to use pads or pedals for pattern play back, and other functions, and about time-saving operations such as copy and help.

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI This chapter explains how to use MIDIwhether it be for saving data to an external device, or for using the TD-10 as a sound module.

Appendices If you run into problems, refer to Troubleshooting to make sure that the settings are correct. If an error message appears during operation, refer to Message/Error Message List and take appropri- ate action. This section also provides information related to sound editing, MIDI, various lists, and the MIDI implementation charts.

* The display screens printed in this owners manual are based on the factory settings. However, please be aware that in some cases they may differ from the actual factory settings.

How to read this owners manual

5

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY.................................................................................................3 How to read this owners manual ........................................................................................5 Features ............................................................................................................................12 Front and rear panel..........................................................................................................14 Important notes .................................................................................................................17 About button operations and the screen displays .............................................................18

Quick Start ..............................21 Before you begin playing..........................22

Mounting the TD-10 to the stand.......................................................................................22 Connect your audio system or amp...................................................................................23 Connecting pads and pedals.............................................................................................24 Turning on the power ........................................................................................................26

To turn the power off ... .....................................................................................................................27

Listening to the internal demo playback ............................................................................28 Specify the pads that the TD-10 will use ...........................................................................29

If you have purchased the V-Basic Kit or V-Standard Kit ....................................................29 If you have purchased the PD-5, PD-7, PD-9, PD-100 or PD-120 individually .........................30 Using triggers on an acoustic drum to play the TD-10 .................................................................33

Check the settings.............................................................................................................34

For a better performance ..........................35 Concerning the performance & expressiveness of the pads.............................................35

Rim shots..............................................................................................................................................35 Choking ................................................................................................................................................35 Positional sensing ...............................................................................................................................36 Playing with brushes..........................................................................................................................36 Hi-hat control pedal ...........................................................................................................................36

TD-10 operating procedure ...............................................................................................37 Adjusting the volume.........................................................................................................................37 Selecting a drum kit............................................................................................................................38 Adjusting the sensitivity of a pad.....................................................................................................39 Master equalizer..................................................................................................................................40 Effect on/off ........................................................................................................................................41 Help function.......................................................................................................................................42

About expansion boards....................................................................................................43 propos des cartes dextension .......................................................................................44 (French language for Canadian Safety Standard)

Troubleshooting connections and settings ........................................................................45

Features of the preset drum kits................47 How sounds are created on the V-drums..........................................................................47 No.36: 70s Rock drum kit .................................................................................................48 No.37: Brush Kit ................................................................................................................50 No.38: Electronic drum kit .................................................................................................52

Contents

6

Modifying a drum kit ................................54 [INST]: Creating drum sounds ..........................................................................................55

Selecting an instrument......................................................................................................................55 Modify the material and depth of the body....................................................................................56 Change the material and tuning of the head ..................................................................................58 Adjust the muffling (muting) and snare strainer tension.............................................................60

[STUDIO]: Adjusting the acoustics of the room.................................................................62 Decide where the drums are played ............................................................................................63 Change the size of the room..............................................................................................................64

[CONTROL ROOM]: Adding finishing touches to the sound.............................................65 Using the equalizer to modify the sound........................................................................................65 Adjusting the volume balance of the instruments .........................................................................67

Examples and convenient tips ...................68 Perform with the on-board sequencer ...............................................................................68

Playing back a preset pattern............................................................................................................68 Play the pads along with a preset pattern.......................................................................................69

Drum Kit ChainSelecting drum kits in the desired order ................................................70 Using a foot switch to select kits .......................................................................................72 Using a pad to playback patterns ......................................................................................72 Using headphones to hear the click sound .......................................................................73 Using the TD-10 as a MIDI sound module ........................................................................74

Advanced Use .........................75 Chapter 1. Overview of the TD-10 V-drums.......76

How the V-drums system is organized..............................................................................76 How to select pads ............................................................................................................77

Using pads to select the pad/sound for editing ............................................................................77 Using the TD-10 to select the pad/sound for editing....................................................................77

Chapter 2. Settings for the entire drum kit ....78 Selecting a kit ....................................................................................................................78 Selecting kits from the list display .....................................................................................78 Naming a kit ......................................................................................................................78 Making settings for brush performance.............................................................................79 Effect switches for the entire kit.........................................................................................79

Contents

7

Chapter 3. Instrument settings ..................80 Selecting an instrument.....................................................................................................80 Selecting instruments from the list display ........................................................................80 Editing an acoustic drum kit (V-EDIT) ..............................................................................81

Selecting the shell material ................................................................................................................81 Changing the shell depth...................................................................................................................82 Selecting the head material................................................................................................................82 Tuning the head ..................................................................................................................................82 Muffling settings (muting) ................................................................................................................83 Adjusting the snare strainer tension ................................................................................................83

Editing an electronic drum kit (V-EDIT) .............................................................................84 Editing a TR-808/909 (V-EDIT) .........................................................................................85 Editing hi-hat, cymbals and percussion.............................................................................86

Chapter 4. Studio settings .........................87 Settings for the entire drum kit ..........................................................................................87

Selecting the studio/room.................................................................................................................87 Changing the size of the room..........................................................................................................87 Changing the wall material ...............................................................................................................87 Selecting the ambience mike location ..............................................................................................87 Adjusting the volume and output assignments of the ambience ................................................88

Settings for each instrument..............................................................................................88 Adjusting the amount of ambience ..................................................................................................88 Selecting the type of mike and its location......................................................................................88

Settings for each group .....................................................................................................89 Adjusting the amount of ambience send level for each group ....................................................89

Chapter 5. Control room settings...............90 Settings for each instrument..............................................................................................90

Adjusting volume (level) ...................................................................................................................90 Adjusting pan (stereo location).........................................................................................................90 Adjusting effect send level ................................................................................................................90 Selecting output assignments............................................................................................................91 Controlling variations in volume (Compressor) ............................................................................91 Customizing the tone (Equalizer).....................................................................................................92

Settings for the entire drum kit ..........................................................................................93 Adjusting effect Return level ............................................................................................................93 Selecting the type of effect .................................................................................................................93 Editing the effects ...............................................................................................................................94

Settings for an entire group...............................................................................................96 Adjusting effect send level for an entire group..............................................................................96 Adjusting the volume by group .......................................................................................................96

Contents

8

Chapter 6. Sequencer................................97 Basic sequencer operation................................................................................................97

Using Preset Patterns .........................................................................................................................97

Setting the tempo ..............................................................................................................97 Setting the tempo for each pattern ...................................................................................................97 Temporarily changing the tempo of the currently-playing pattern............................................97

Playback functions ............................................................................................................98 Selecting a pattern...............................................................................................................................98 Selecting patterns from the list .........................................................................................................98 Selecting how a pattern will playback.............................................................................................98

Click settings .....................................................................................................................99 Click on/off and volume settings ....................................................................................................99 Setting the tempo ................................................................................................................................99 Setting the time signature and click interval ..................................................................................99 Selecting the click sound..................................................................................................................100 Using ambience.................................................................................................................................100 Using effects ......................................................................................................................................100 Adjusting the pan (stereo location) ................................................................................................100 Selecting the output destination .....................................................................................................100

Recording ........................................................................................................................101 Basic recording procedure...............................................................................................................101 The Rehearsal function ....................................................................................................................102 Using a count-in ................................................................................................................................102 Start recording the moment that you strike a pad .......................................................................102 Correcting timing as you record (Quantize).................................................................................103 Importing data from another sequencer into the TD-10 .............................................................103

Editing a pattern ..............................................................................................................103 Naming a pattern..............................................................................................................................103 Erasing a pattern ...............................................................................................................................104 Erasing selected measures of a pattern..........................................................................................104 Copying a pattern .............................................................................................................................104 Copying selected measures of a pattern........................................................................................105 Clearing a pattern .............................................................................................................................105 Clearing selected measures of a pattern........................................................................................105 Connecting two patterns..................................................................................................................106

Settings for part instruments ...........................................................................................106 Adjusting the master tuning ...........................................................................................................106 Instrument selection and settings for each part ...........................................................................106 Mixer settings for each part.............................................................................................................107 Muting a specific part.......................................................................................................................107

Contents

9

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10...108 Changing output assignment for audio received by the MIX IN jack...............................108 Specifying the type of pad...............................................................................................108 Basic settings for the trigger parameters (BASIC) ..........................................................109 Detailed settings for the trigger parameters (ADVNCD)..................................................111 The order in which trigger parameters should be set when using drum triggers.............112 Adjusting the brightness of the display............................................................................113 Setting the master equalizer............................................................................................113 Saving data to a memory card ........................................................................................114 Loading data from a memory card ..................................................................................115 Automatically switching the display (Note Chase)...........................................................115

Chapter 8. Convenient functions..............116 Selecting kits in the desired order (Drum Kit Chain) .......................................................116

Specifying a Drum Kit Chain ..........................................................................................................116 Naming a Drum Kit Chain ..............................................................................................................116

Copying ...........................................................................................................................117 The UNDO function .........................................................................................................117 Getting help .....................................................................................................................118 Specifying how the Preview button functions ..................................................................118

Chapter 9. Operations using pads and foot switches ..........................................119

Using pads to play patterns (Pad Pattern) ......................................................................119 Using pads to perform button operations (Pad Switch) ..................................................119 Using foot switches to perform button operations (Foot Switch) .....................................120

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI ............121 Saving/Loading data to/from an external device (Bulk Dump) ........................................121

Saving data ........................................................................................................................................121 Loading saved data to the TD-10....................................................................................................121 Setting the Device IDTransmitting saved data to two or more TD-10 units........................122

Using pads to play an external MIDI sound module........................................................122 Selecting the note number transmitted by each pad ...................................................................122 Setting the Gate Time .......................................................................................................................123 Setting the MIDI channel .................................................................................................................123

Using the TD-10 with the Roland SPD-11.......................................................................123 MIDI settings for the entire TD-10 ...................................................................................124

Setting the MIDI channels for each Part ........................................................................................124 Turning off Local Control................................................................................................................124 Disabling reception or transmission of Program Changes.........................................................124 Reducing the amount of data transmitted by the FD-7 (Pedal Data Thin) ..............................124

Using the TD-10 as a sound module...............................................................................125 Setting the instrument for each part ..............................................................................................125 Adjusting the mixer settings for each part....................................................................................125 Regarding note numbers for the drum kit sounds ......................................................................125 Using the percussion group ............................................................................................................126 Changing the kit number that is selected by a program change ...............................................128

Contents

10

MIDI messages for detailed performance expressions ...................................................128 Messages for hi-hat control .............................................................................................................128 Messages for positional sensing (snare drum and ride cymbal only).......................................129

Synchronization with external MIDI devices....................................................................129

Appendices............................131 Troubleshooting...............................................................................................................132 Instruments that can be used with each trigger...............................................................136 Restoring the factory settings (INITIALIZE).....................................................................137 Message / error message list ..........................................................................................138 About MIDI ......................................................................................................................140 Using drum triggers .........................................................................................................142 Preset list.........................................................................................................................143 MIDI implementation .......................................................................................................154 MIDI implementation chart ..............................................................................................165 Specifications ..................................................................................................................168 Glossary ..........................................................................................................................169 Index of screen displays..................................................................................................173 Index................................................................................................................................176

* PinStripe is a registered trademark of Remo Inc. U.S.A.

Contents

11

Enhanced tonal quality and expressiveness that rivals acoustic drums

The TD-10 features a newly developed modeling sound module that relies on COSM technology. The force and position of the hit are detected, providing sensitive and dynamic expression that is extremely close to that of acoustic drums. In addition, when PD-100 or PD-120 (optional) pads are used, you can enjoy excellent response when playing rolls.

* COSM (Composite Object Sound Modeling) is a Roland technology which combines multiple sound model- ing processes to create new sounds.

* Positional detection is possible on snare drums and ride cymbals.

With 600 drum sounds and 54 backing instrument provided A rich array of instrumental sounds are provided, sufficient to cover all styles of music.

A user interface comfortable for drummers You can create sounds much in the same way that you would using acoustic drums when you select a preferred drum head, tune it, and attach muffling (muting) material. With the large display, the use of graphics and icons to portray parameters being set and their meanings, operation is intuitive and easily understood.

High-speed trigger response The triggering time (time delay from hitting the pad until you hear the sound) is faster than ever, allowing expressiveness and dynamics to be reproduced accurately.

Twelve pads can be used simultaneously Since up to twelve pads can be used simultaneously, you can create large-scale setups bigger than ever before. This also gives you flexibility for extended applications, such as using pads as switches (Pad Switch) or for pattern playback (Pad Pattern).

Simulate the entire process of actual recording By being able to choose drum materials, sizes, studio location, mike types and their settings, effects and mixer parameters, the TD-10 allows total flexibility for recording or live applications. All of these settings can be stored as part of a drum kit,for instant recall at any time.

Perform using brushes If you use the PD-100 or PD-120 pads, you can play with brushes, something not possible with any previous electronic drum system. (Nylon brush only please!).

Sound processing specially selected for drums For each instrument assigned to trigger inputs 110, individual two-band equalizers and compres- sors are provided. In addition,(in the control room) there are digital effects: reverbs, flanger, cho- rus, delays, pitch shift delay, and phaser. A three-band equalizer is also provided for processing the sound at the MASTER OUT. Ambience(in the Studio) lets you choose WHERE the drums are being played. You can change the sound of that space by changing the material of the walls, size of the room and the position of the ambient mikes. There are individual ambience send levels for all instruments.

Features

12

Functions and operations perfect for live performances The group faders on the front panel let you make quick changes as needed during performance. You can play drum kits in any desired order (Drum Kit Chain). The INC/DEC buttons are large enough to be pressed with a drum stick. (Dont HIT them!) Another very useful function allows you to send the click sound ONLY to the headphones if desired. An audio input (stereo) for custom monitoring (MIX IN jack) is also provided.

Easy-operation sequencer is built-in With easy, tape recorder-like operations, you can record or play back patterns. In addition to the drums, three backing parts can be added for ensemble practice or for creating backing patterns via MIDI keyboard, external sequencer etc.

* Brush swish/sweeping and choke cannot be recorded.

Previous models of pads can be used Previous pad models (PD-5, PD-7, PD-9), kick trigger units (KD-5, KD-7) and the hi-hat control pedal (FD-7) are all compatible. Also, the PD-7 and PD-9 allow positional sensing for the snare drum and ride cymbal.

User Installable Expansion boards allow extended functionality WAVE & SYSTEM EXPANSION BOARD TDW series will bring more instruments and drum kits to the TD-10, and allows the system to be upgraded through Flash ROM. A memory card (M-512E) can be used to store all kits and patterns for the TD-10.

Usable as a MIDI sound module Percussion groups are provided so these sounds can be accessed via MIDI as with a dedicated mod- ule, so in addition to sounds assigned to the 12 trigger inputs, a special note map for percussion allows 72 types of instruments to be accessed simultaneously.

Features

13

Front Panel

1

2 3

4 5678

9

10

11 12 13 14

15 16 17

18

20

19

21

22

Front and rear panel

14

Trigger Indicator This will light when a trigger signal (signal produced when pad is struck) is received from a pad. It allows you to check whether the pad has been connected correctly.

LED Display Displays the number of the currently selected drum kit.

Graphic Display During performance, this indicates the drum kit name and other important information. During editing, various graph- ics and text relative to the editing process is indicated.

* In this owners manual, this will be referred to simply as the display.

F1-F4 Buttons These buttons change their function depending on the con- tents of the display. The lower part of the display will indi- cate the function of each button (p. 18).

EXIT Button Press this button and you will return to the screen one level higher in the hierarchy. Repeated pressing takes you back to the DRUM KIT page.

TOOLS Button Provides access to functions such as Copy, Undo, and Help. (p. 42, 117)

CHAIN Button Lets you make Drum Kit Chain settings (a function that arranges drum kits in a desired order for successive selec- tion) (p. 70, 116).

SETUP Button Here you can make settings that affect the entire TD-10, such as trigger parameters and MIDI settings (p. 108).

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

GROUP FADERS These allow you to adjust the volume of the kick, snare, hi- hat, other percussion instruments, backing instruments, and the click sound (p. 37).

SEQUENCER Here are the buttons that control sequencer functions (play- back/recording of performance patterns) (p. 68, 97).

KIT Button Provides access to the basic display page used when playing the TD-10.

INST (Instrument) Button Provides access to the display page in which you can edit instruments (p. 55, 80).

STUDIO Button Provides access to the display page where you can choose mike types, their positions, ambience types and ambient mike positions (p. 62, 87).

CONTROL ROOM Button Allows you to edit mixer, EQ, compressor and effect para- meters (p. 65, 90).

MIX IN Knob This adjusts the volume of the device connected to the MIX IN jack. The sound from the MIX IN will be output from the MASTER out and/or the PHONES jack.

PHONES Knob Adjusts the headphone volume. Even when headphones are connected, sound will still be output from the various out- put jacks.

MASTER Knob Adjusts the volume of the MASTER OUT jacks. The volume of the PHONES jack is adjusted by the PHONES knob.

CURSOR Buttons Used to move the cursor in the display, or to access the next display page (p. 18).

VALUE Dial This dial has the same function as the INC and DEC buttons. Use this dial when you wish to make large changes in drum kit settings or edited values (p. 19).

TRIG SELECT Use the lower two buttons to select the pad (trigger number) for which you wish to make settings. To select the rim of a pad, press the RIM button, then the RIM indicator is lit. If pads are connected to the TD-10, you can also select a pad by striking it. The PREVIEW button lets you audition the instrument that is assigned to the selected pad or the sound appearing in the display when editing a percussion group (p. 20).

PREVIEW Button Used to audition an instrument. By using TRIG SELECT but- tons to select a pad, you can play and edit sound even if no pads are connected to the TD-10. The button is velocity sen- sitive (p. 20).

INC Button, DEC Button These buttons are used to switch drum kits or to modify val- ues. Pressing the INC button increases the value, and press- ing the DEC button decreases it. Since these buttons are large, you can also use the tip of your drum stick to press them (p. 19).

* Please be aware that hitting the buttons with a stick can cause malfunctions.

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Front and rear panel

15

Rear Panel

23

24 2529

30

3132

33

34 26

2728

Front and rear panel

16

MEMORY CARD Slot An M-512E memory card (optional) can be inserted into this slot. Each memory card can store all settings of the TD-10, such as drum kits and sequencer performance data, etc (p. 114).

* The M-512E is the only memory card that can be used by the TD-10.

TRIGGER INPUT Jacks Accept the pads or kick trigger units you want to connect to the TD-10. To connect a dual trigger type pad (PD-7, PD-9, PD-120), use a stereo cable (p. 24).

FOOT SWITCH Jack Accepts connection of an optional foot switch (FS-5U). A foot switch can be used to select kits and start/stop the sequencer, etc. Use a special PCS-31 cable (optional) (p. 72, 120).

HH CTRL Jack Accepts connection of a hi-hat control pedal (FD-7) (p. 36).

OUTPUT (MASTER) Jacks These jacks output the instrumental sounds of the TD-10, and are for connection to external audio devices or amps. If you are listening in mono, connect to only the MASTER L (MONO) jack (p. 23).

OUTPUT (DIRECT 1, 2, 3) Jacks The direct outs allow you to have more separation, over the total kit, and can be used for external effects etc. Ambience may also be sent from these outputs, but NOT the digital effects. Output assignments DIRECT 1, 2 or 3 jacks are found in the Control Room (p. 91).

PHONES Jack A pair of stereo headphones can be connected to this jack. Even if headphones are connected, sound will still be output from the OUTPUT jacks (p. 23).

MIX IN Jack This jack is used to connect a CD or cassette player, or as a custom monitoring input for live/recording performances. The sound that is input to this jack will be output from the MASTER out jacks and/or the PHONES jack (p. 108).

MIDI IN Connector Use this connector when you wish to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the sounds of the TD-10, or when loading TD-10 settings (bulk data) that were saved on an external device (p. 121).

MIDI OUT/THRU Connector Use this connector when you wish to use play sounds in an external MIDI sound module/sampler from the pads, or when you wish to transmit TD-10 settings (bulk data) to another MIDI device (p. 121).

POWER Switch This switch turns the power on/off (p. 26).

AC Inlet Connect the included AC power cable to this inlet (p. 23).

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

Power Supply Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any

device that will generate line noise (such as an electric motor or variable lighting system).

Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices.

Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment

containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference.

This device may interfere with radio and television recep- tion. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.

Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehi- cle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.

Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth

or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.

Never use benzene, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.

Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the units mem-

ory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be backed up on a RAM card/DATA card, in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer), or written down on paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

Memory Backup This unit contains a battery which powers the units

memory circuits while the main power is off. When this battery becomes weak, the message shown below will appear in the display. Once you see this message, have the battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to avoid the loss of all data in memory. To have the bat- tery replaced, consult with your dealer, or qualified Roland service personnel. Backup Battery Low !

Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irre-

trievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you peri- odically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the units memory on a RAM card/DATA card, in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer).

Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the con- tents of data that was stored on a RAM card/DATA card, in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer), in the units memory once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

Use a reasonable amount of care when using the units

buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.

Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display. When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the

connector itselfnever pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cables inter- nal elements.

A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation.

To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the units volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use head- phones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is late at night).

Since sound vibrations can be transmitted through floors and walls to a greater degree than expected, take care not to allow such sound to become a nuisance to neighbors, especially at night and when using headphones. Although the drum pads and pedals are designed so there is a minimal amount of extraneous sound produced when they're struck, rubber heads tend to produce louder sounds compared to mesh heads. You can effectively reduce much of the unwanted sound from the pads by switching to mesh heads.

When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.

Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some other make of connection cable, please note the fol- lowing precautions. Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use

cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor- mation on cable specifications, contact the manufactur- er of the cable.

Before Using Cards Using DATA Cards New M-512E DATA cards do not yet have their battery

installed. Before a DATA card can be used, you first need to insert the battery (refer to the instructions supplied with the DATA card).

M-512E DATA cards are equipped with a PROTECT switch, which when turned on protects your data from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the switch be kept at the ON position, and switched to OFF only at the times you wish to write new data onto the card.

When the battery in an M-512E DATA card is nearly worn out, the message below will be shown in the dis- play. Refer to the instructions supplied with the DATA card and promptly replace the battery to avoid the loss of the data on it. MEMORY CARD Battery Low ! Please Change !

Carefully insert the DATA card all the way inuntil it is firmly in place.

Never touch the terminals of the DATA card. Also, avoid getting the terminals dirty.

OffOn

Important notes

17

In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and

USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 24, please read and observe the following:

Operations common to all aspects of operating the TD-10 are covered below.

Saving your settings For operations within the TD-10, there is no procedure for saving settings. When you modify the value of a setting, the new value is automatically saved as soon as you make the change.

Buttons, sliders and knobs Buttons, sliders and knobs on the front panel will be printed in square brackets [ ]; e.g., [SETUP].

Cursor fig.00-003e

Cursor refers to the highlighted characters indicating an on-screen item that can be set. If the screen contains more than one item that can be set, use the [CURSOR] buttons to move it to the item that you wish to set.

fig.00-003a

Function buttons ([F1][F4]) fig.00-004

The [F1][F4] buttons are called the function buttons. The bottom part of the display will show the names of the functions available for [F1][F4]. For example, if this owners manual makes reference to [INST]-[F1 (SHELL)], press [INST] , and then press [F1] (in this case, SHELL is displayed above [F1]).

Cursor

About button operations and the screen displays

18

How to modify settings fig.00-005e

[INC] and [DEC] (referred to in this manual as [INC/DEC]) and the VALUE dial are both used to modify the values of settings. The two methods have the following advantages.

[INC/DEC] Each time [INC] is pressed, the value increases. Each time [DEC] is pressed, the value decreases.

This is convenient for fine adjustments. When making an on/off setting, [INC] will turn the setting on and [DEC] will turn it off. If you hold down [INC] and press [DEC], the value will increase rapidly. If you hold down [DEC]

and press [INC] the value will decrease rapidly.

VALUE dial Since the dial allows you to make major changes to the value at once, its a convenient way to make broad adjustments to a parameter quickly.

About the upper right of the screen display fig.00-006e

In pages that allow you to make settings for each pad, you can strike the desired pad to see the set- ting page for that pad. At this time, the upper right of the display will show the number of the trig- ger jack to which the selected pad is connected, the instrument that it is using, and the MIDI note number. The first character (H or R) indicates whether the head or the rim of the pad is selected. The numerals at the right are the MIDI note number. You will need to know the MIDI note number when using the TD-10 as a MIDI sound module.

The H or R display will indicate whether the head or rim will sound when you press the Preview button. In cases where settings for the head and rim can be edited separately, the following characters will also be displayed, letting you know the page in which you are.

fig.00-007

INC/DEC button VALUE dial

Trigger number Instrument name (or Trigger name)

Rim

Head

MIDI note number

About button operations and the screen displays

19

Selecting pads from the TD-10 front panel fig.00-008

The trigger select buttons ([TRIG SELECT]) are used when you wish to select a sound for editing from the front panel of the TD-10, rather than by striking a pad as explained above. You can use these buttons to select a trigger number and edit the settings. When you press the button marked 1, the next lower-numbered trigger will be selected. When you press the button marked 12, the next higher-numbered trigger will be selected. When using a PD-7, PD-9 or PD-120, the rim button ([RIM]) lets you specify whether you are mak- ing settings for the head or the rim. When the [RIM] indicator is lit, the rim is selected. By using these buttons in conjunction with the preview button, you can edit without pads connected to the TD-10.

* Depending on the instrument selection, there will be no distinction between head and rim in some cases. For details refer to p. 136.

About the Preset Drum Kits When the instrument is shipped from the factory, drum kits 150 are already pre-loaded. Even if you modify the settings of these drum kits, you can restore them to their factory settings at any time. These drum kits are referred to as the Preset Drum Kits. For details, refer to p. 137.

About the basic screen fig.00-008ae

This screen is the TD-10s basic screen, which will appear when you press [KIT]. In addition to the kit name, it displays the status of the memory card (p. 78), the effect on/off setting (p. 79), and whether or not the kit is for brushes (p. 79) etc.

Screen name

Drum kit name

Effect on/off

Settings for brushes

About button operations and the screen displays

20

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Quick Start

21

This section explains the connections and settings that you must make before playing. The explana- tions here are given, assuming that the TD-10 has its factory settings.

The TD-10 provides a function for restoring the factory settings. Refer to Restoring the factory settings (INI- TIALIZE) on p. 137.

Mounting the TD-10 to the stand Attach the stand holder (included with the optional MDS-7U/10) to the TD-10.

fig.00-009e

Using the included screws, attach it so that the unit is oriented as shown in the above diagram.

Use the included screws. Using other screws can cause damage.

Next, attach the TD-10 to the drum stand (MDS-7U/10). For details on assembling the drum stand and attaching the TD-10, refer to the owners manual for the drum stand (MDS-7U/10).

To attach the TD-10 to a cymbal stand (or the like), you may want to make use of the separately available APC-33 All Purpose Clamp. Make sure, though, that the cymbal stand you intend to use has pipes with a diameter of between 10.5 and 30 millimeters.

MEMO

Narrow

Wide

NOTE

MEMO

Before you begin playing

22

Connect your audio system or amp To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

fig.00-010e

Connect the rear panel MASTER L(MONO) and R jacks to your audio system or amps. If you will be using headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack.

Be sure that the TD-10s MASTER L and R jacks are connected respectively to the L and R of your audio sys- tem or amps. In consideration of live performance situations, the headphone output is designed to produce a higher volume than other electronic musical instruments. Extended listening at high volumes will damage your hearing, so please pay attention to the volume adjustment.

At the factory settings, no sound will be output from the DIRECT 1, DIRECT 2 or DIRECT 3 jacks.

NOTE

to AC power outlet Stereo headphones

Power cord

Audio cable

Audio set, etc.

R L

NOTE

MEMO

Before you begin playing

23

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Connecting pads and pedals Using the cables provided, connect your pads, hi-hat control pedals and kick trigger units as shown in the above diagram. Special jacks are provided for the kick (KICK) and snare (SNARE), so make the correct connections to these jacks.

fig.00-011e

Roland

Roland

TD-10 Rear panel

Before you begin playing

24

If you are using a PD-7 or PD-9, move the polarity switch located on the back of the pad to the -(Roland) position. When using a KD-7, either position will do.

fig.00-012

To have the most expressive performance, we recommend the use of the Roland pads (PD-5, PD-7, PD-9, PD- 100, PD-120) and kick trigger units (KD-7).

NOTE

PD-7, PD-9

OUTPUT POLARITY + - (Roland)

MEMO

Before you begin playing

25

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Turning on the power Once the connections have been completed (p. 23, 24), turn on power to your various devices in the order spec- ified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

fig.00-013

1 Rotate [MASTER] and [PHONES] all the way to the left to turn down the volume.

2 Turn down the volume of the connected amp or audio system.

3 Turn on the POWER switch located on the rear panel of the TD-10.

Caution when turning on the power After turning on the power, do not press the hi-hat control pedal (FD-7) until the drum kit

name (see the following illustration) appears in the display. If the pedal was pressed while the power was being turned on, hi-hat open/close operations cannot be per- formed correctly.

After turning on the power, do not strike a pad until the drum kit name appears in the dis- play. Striking a pad while the power is being turned on will cause poor response when the pad is struck softly.

fig.00-037

NOTE

5

3

6

1

NOTE

Before you begin playing

26

4 Turn on the power of the connected amp or audio system.

5 Raise the [GROUP FADERS] sliders to the maximum position, and adjust [MASTER] ([PHONES]) to the position shown in the diagram.

fig.00-014a

6 While striking [PREVIEW] with your finger, adjust the volume of the connected amp or audio sys- tem. If you are using headphones, gradually raise [PHONES] to adjust the volume.

The TD-10 will produce sound. The volume will depend on the force with which you struck [PRE- VIEW].

You can use [TRIG SELECT] to select and audition the instrument for each pad.

To turn the power off ...

1 Make sure that the TD-10 volume controls and the connected external devices are turned to the minimum position.

2 Turn off the power of the external devices.

3 Turn off the power of the TD-10.

If there is no sound when you strike [PREVIEW] ... Check the following points.

If you are using headphones, are they connected to the PHONES jack? If you are using an external amp, is it connected to the MASTER jacks? Are the

audio cables connected correctly to the input jacks of the external amp, etc.? Could there be a problem with the cables connected to the external amp? Are the input select settings of the external amp correct? Are the [GROUP FADERS] sliders lowered? Could the [PHONES] volume be too low? Could the [MASTER] volume be too low?

MEMO

Before you begin playing

27

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Listening to the internal demo playback The TD-10 contains demo songs that demonstrate its sounds and expressive capabilities. The demo song is a rainbow of 4 short songs, arranged as a medley. It plays back in loop (repeating) mode, yet you can also listen, starting from any of 4 positions, accessed as follows:

fig.00-015

1 Set each of the [GROUP FADERS] sliders [KICK][SNARE][HI-HAT][OTHERS][BACKING] to the same volume.

2 Hold down [SETUP] and press [CHAIN].

In this display, the cursor defaults to Rock.

3 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the section number.

You can start listening from the beginning of any of the four sections.

4 Press [PLAY].

You can listen to the medley and it will continue to loop. During playback, the [GROUP FADERS] function normally allowing you to mix the demo song as you wish. (for more info on the [GROUP FADERS], see page 37.)

5 Press [STOP] to stop playback.

Once you are through listening to the demos, press [EXIT] to return to the DRUM KIT page.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws. No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT/THRU.

Drum kit 3942 are used in the Demo Song.

For details of the Demo Song, refer to page 179.

2

5 41

3

NOTE

MEMO

Before you begin playing

28

Specify the pads that the TD-10 will use In order for the TD-10 to accurately receive trigger signals from each pad, you must specify the type of pad that is connected to each TRIGGER INPUT jack.

If you have purchased the V-Basic Kit or V-Standard Kit Trigger settings for the V-Basic Kit or the V-Standard Kit are provided, so you can call up and select them.

fig.00-016

1 Press [SETUP], press [F1 (TRIG)], and then press [F1 (BANK)].

2 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the BANK number.

3 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

V-Basic Kit: BANK 1 V-Standard Kit: BANK 2

If the settings have been modified and are different than the settings in the above diagram, use the Copy func- tion to restore the factory settings (p. 137).

This completes settings for all pads of the V-Basic Kit or V-Standard Kit. If you are using a PD-100 or PD-120, make settings for the head tension as explained on p. 31.

Once you have completed your settings, press [EXIT] enough times to get back to the DRUM KIT page.

1 2

3

NOTE

Before you begin playing

29

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

If you have purchased the PD-5, PD-7, PD-9, PD-100 or PD-120 individually

Make the following settings for each pad. fig.00-023

1 Press [SETUP], press [F1 (TRIG)], and then press [F1 (BANK)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-017 This screen shows a list of pad models that are specified for each TRIGGER INPUT jack.

Display Pad name PD5 PD-5 PD7 PD-7 PD9 PD-9 10A PD-100 12A PD-120 KD7 KD-7/KD-5

* For details on 10B and 12B, refer to p. 108.

2 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to a location other than BANK.

3 Strike the pad for which you wish to make settings.

The cursor will move to the edited value of the pad that you struck.

4 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the model name of the pad.

This completes pad settings. If you are using a PD-100 or PD-120, make settings for the head tension as explained in the following section.

1 2

4

Before you begin playing

30

Adjusting the head tension For these pads, adjustments are required in order to regularize the tension of the head. Also, the ten- sion of the head may change when the pad has been used for a long period. If this occurs, use the following procedure to make adjustments as necessary.

fig.00-025

1 Make sure that the Trigger Type (pad model name) is set either to 10A (PD-100) or to 12A (PD- 120).

2 Press [SETUP], then press [F1 (TRIG)], and then press [F4 (OPTION)].

3 Strike the PD-100 or PD-120 for which you wish to make settings.

The setting page for the pad that you struck will appear. fig.00-026

4 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Head Tension Adjustment.

5 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

With a setting of Loose it will be adjusted at a weaker tension, and with a setting of Tight it will be adjusted at a stronger tension. For now, set this to the medium value of Normal.

5

2 4

Before you begin playing

31

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

6 On the head of the PD-100 or PD-120, accurately strike a location approximately 1 inch (3 cm) from the tuning bolt.

fig.00-027e

The indicator in the lower right of the display will indicate how far off the adjustment is.

7 Use a tuning key (optional) to turn the all tuning bolt so that the indicator reaches the position shown in the diagram. fig.00-027ae

If the indicator is toward the right, turn the tuning key toward the left to loosen the tension. If the indicator is toward the left, turn the tuning key toward the right to tighten the tension.

If the indicator moves greatly to the left or right, adjust the tension of the entire head before making this set- ting.

The head tension adjustment does not work correctly when the SCAN TIME (p. 111) setting is excessively low. The SCAN TIME setting is automatically set to the most efficient values for each pad when you select the TRIGGER TYPE (P.108). If you have changed the SCAN TIME setting, select the TRIGGER TYPE again.

For details on adjusting the head tension, refer to the PD-100/120 owners manual.

Once you have completed your settings, press [EXIT] enough times to get back to the DRUM KIT page.

1 inch (3 cm)

Strike here

Tuning bolt

Indicator

NOTE

MEMO

Before you begin playing

32

Using triggers on an acoustic drum to play the TD-10 Set the trigger type to the drum trigger setting, and if notes are not sounded accurately, youll need to make changes in the advanced mode of this section. For details, refer to Detailed settings for the trigger parameters (ADVNCD) (p. 111) in the Advanced Use. First refer to p. 142 and attach the drum trigger. When you have done so, make the following set- tings for each trigger.

fig.00-023

1 Press [SETUP], then press [F1 (TRIG)], and then press [F1 (BANK)].

The following screen will appear: fig.00-017

This screen shows a list of the trigger types that are specified for each TRIGGER INPUT jack.

2 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to a location other than BANK.

3 Strike the drum (or press the kick pedal) for which you wish to make settings.

The cursor will move to the trigger number of the drum that you struck.

4 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the trigger type. Make the following settings for each trigger.

KIK: Kick drum TOM: Tom SNR: Snare drum FLR: Floor tom

Once you have completed your settings, press [EXIT] enough times to get back to the DRUM KIT page.

1 2

4

Before you begin playing

33

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Check the settings This completes the settings. Strike the pads/drums and verify that the appropriate instrument sounds correctly. If not, check the settings once again, and refer to Troubleshooting connections and settings on p. 45.

Before you begin playing

34

Concerning the performance & expressiveness of the pads

This section introduces various performance functions that will help you perform more expressively on the pads. Some of these playing techniques and functions are unique to the TD-10, so please be sure to read this section in order take full advantage of the TD-10s capabilities.

Rim shots By using the rim, you can play two types of sound from one pad. This can be done with a PD-7, PD- 9 and PD-120.

fig.00-030e

To play a rim shot, you must strike both the head (center area) and the rim (outer edge) of the pad simultaneously. There will be no sound if you strike only the rim. When you play a rim shot, the instrument assigned to the rim will sound.

When specifying the rim during editing, you will also need to strike the head and rim simultaneously. Important: The rim function of the PD-120 ONLY works when connected to trigger input 2 (SNARE). If you desire rim sounds for the toms etc., please use a PD-7 or PD-9.

Choking This function simulates the muting of a cymbal and can be done with a PD-7 or PD-9.

fig.00-031

By striking a pad and then squeeze the rim portion of the pad while the note is still sounding, you can mute the sounding note; a performance technique known as choking.

Pad

Rim of the pad

Rim shotNormal shot

Pad

NOTE

For a better performance

35

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Positional sensing This function simulates movement across the snare drum head or ride cymbal surface. A PD-7, PD- 9, PD-100 or PD-120 can be used when connected to trigger jacks number 2 or 10.

fig.00-032e

For the snare drum and ride cymbals, differences in striking position between the center of the head and the rim area will produce a natural change in tone. When the PD-120 is used as a snare, changes in tone and response will produce playability rivaling that of an acoustic drum.

Playing with brushes The TD-10 allows you to play using brushes when using a PD-100 or PD-120 only . You can use tech- niques such as swishing or sweeping to trigger that type of sound, as with an acoustic drum. When using brushes, you must select a drum kit that is intended for brush playing. Press [KIT], and select a kit that has a symbol like the following at the lower right of the kit name.

fig.00-033

ONLY use nylon/plastic brushes. Metal brushes will damage the head and/or could pierce the fine mesh of the head itself.

Of the preset drum kits, numbers 7 and 37 are for brush playing.

Hi-hat control pedal A hi-hat control pedal can be used for the following performance techniques, giving you continuous control from open to closed positions. This can be done with an FD-7.

fig.00-033a

Open hi-hat: Strike the pad without pressing the pedal. Closed hi-hat: Strike the pad while pressing the pedal. Pedalled closed: Step on the pedal to trigger the foot close hi-hat. Pedalled open: Step on, and quickly release pedal to trigger the foot open hi-hat sound.

Tonal differences by strike location

NOTE

MEMO

FD-7

For a better performance

36

TD-10 operating procedure This section explains basic operation of the TD-10. Please try out each of these procedures.

Adjusting the volume

Adjusting the volume balance For the kick drum, snare drum and hi-hat, use the [GROUP FADERS] sliders to adjust the volume. Tom and cymbal, etc. are all adjusted as a group by [OTHERS]. Volume adjustments for each pad of the kit are made by the Control Room settings (p. 90).

fig.00-034

Adjusting the overall volume Use [VOLUME CONTROL] to adjust the volume of the TD-10s MASTER output jacks. Rotating it clockwise increases volume, and rotating it counterclockwise decreases volume.

fig.00-035

[MASTER]: Adjusts the volume output from the MASTER OUT jacks. [PHONES]: Adjusts the volume output from the headphone jack. [MIX IN]: Adjusts the volume that is input from the MIX IN jack.

The input from MIX IN is output from the MASTER jacks and the PHONES jack (alter- natively, only from the PHONES jack).

For a better performance

37

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Selecting a drum kit fig.00-036

1 Press [KIT].

The following screen will appear: fig.00-037

Each drum kit of the TD-10 is a collection of settings for the instrument assigned to each pad, set- tings for the room and microphones, mixer, effects and other parameters.

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a kit.

The List display makes it easier to select a drum kit. In the above display, press [F1 (LIST)], and ten kit names will appear in one screen, allowing you to select the desired kit. Press [F1 (PAGE <)] to move to the previous page, or [F2 (PAGE >)] to move to the next page. In this display, you can select kits using [INC/DEC], the VALUE dial, or [CURSOR].

fig.00-038

Press [EXIT] to return to the display page of step 1.

2

1

MEMO

For a better performance

38

Adjusting the sensitivity of a pad You may wish to adjust the sensitivity of the pads to accommodate your personal taste. In this sec- tion we will explain the easiest way to adjust the TD-10s sensitivity in order to get the best correla- tion between your playing velocity (strength) and the response and volume of the sound.

fig.00-047

1 Press [SETUP], then press [F1 (TRIG)], and then press [F2 (BASIC)].

The following screen will appear:

2 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Sensitivity.

3 Strike a pad to select the one needing sensitivity adjustment.

4 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to adjust the sensitivity.

The numeric value at the cursor will change (within the range from 1 to 16). Lower sensitivity (lower values) will mean that stronger strikes will not increase the volume very much. Conversely, higher sen- sitivity will mean that loud volumes will be reached quickly as you play more strongly. In general, it is best to set the sensitivity so that the indicator reaches the maximum position when you play with your maximum dynamics.

Overall volume is an important element in adjusting the sensitivity of an electronic drum kit. In particular, if you are listening at a low volume you may feel that there is too little change in volume, so you might raise the sensitivity excessively without really needing to. Try playing at different volume levels (through amps or head- phones) in order to fine tune the sensitivity. In order to make settings correctly, adjust the volume to an appro- priate level.

21

4

Trigger indicator

NOTE

For a better performance

39

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Master equalizer This is the master equalizer that is applied to the sound output from the MASTER OUT jacks. It adjusts the balance of the low, mid, and high frequency ranges. Lets try adjusting the GAIN (the amount of boost).

fig.00-043

1 Press [KIT], and then press [F4 (MAS EQ)].

The following screen will appear: fig.00-044

2 Use [F2][F4] or [CURSOR] to select the GAIN column.

[F2]: Low range (LOW) [F3]: Middle range (MID) [F4]: High range (HIGH)

[F1] functions as an equalizer on/off switch.

3 Use the VALUE dial to modify the value, and hear how the sound changes.

Press [EXIT] to return to the DRUM KIT display page.

2

3

1

MEMO

For a better performance

40

Effect on/off If you wish to compare your sounds with or without ambiance, individual compressors & equalizers, or digital effects, here they can each be turned on/off for the entire kit.

fig.00-040

1 Press [KIT], and then press [F3 (FX SW)].

The following screen will appear: fig.00-041

In this page, [F1][F4] act as on/off switches. For example, pressing [F1] will turn ambiance on/off.

AMBNCE (Ambience):The size of the room and the type of walls can be adjusted to modify the sound.

COMP (Compressor): This is used to smooth volume peaks, preventing overload. EQ (Equalizer): This adjusts the balance of the high, mid and low ranges. EFFECT (Effect): This adds effects such as reverb or delay.

When these switches are turned off, effects will not apply, regardless of any other settings. Before using ambi- ence or effects, make sure that these switches are turned on.

These settings can be made for each drum kit.

Press [EXIT] to return to the DRUM KIT display page.

1

NOTE

MEMO

For a better performance

41

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Help function You can select a keyword for a specific operation and instantly view an explanation or the relative setting page. For example if you wish to make settings for a function using a foot switch, select the FOOT SWITCH keyword and press the button to access the appropriate setting page.

fig.00-045a

1 Press [TOOLS], and then press [F4 (HELP)].

The following screen (keyword list) will appear: fig.00-046

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a keyword.

3 Press [F4 (SELECT)], and an explanation of the function will appear.

4 If you wish to go to the setting page for that function, press [F4 (GO NOW)].

Once you have completed your settings, press [EXIT] enough times to get back to the DRUM KIT page.

2

1 3,4

For a better performance

42

About expansion boards Expansion boards (optional) are cards that allow you to upgrade the system and add new instru- ments and drum kits.

* Sound expansion boards for the Roland JV/XP series cannot be used.

For a better performance

43

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

The bottom panel of the TD-10 has a slot that allows expan- sion boards to be installed. Install only the specified circuit board(s) (WAVE & SYSTEM EXPANSION BOARD TDW series).

1. Always turn the TD-10 off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board (WAVE & SYSTEM EXPANSION BOARD TDW series).

2. Remove only the four screws as indicated below, and open the cover located on the bottom of the TD-10.

fig.00-049ae

3. Check that the plastic board holders are positioned as shown figure. Rotate them if necessary.

fig.00-049be

4. While positioning the holes on the board over the board holders, carefully insert the connector on the board into the socket on the TD-10. Make sure the connector is securely connected, and that all three board holders pro- ject through the holes.

* Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals.

* Never use excessive force when installing a Expansion Board. If it doesnt fit properly on the first attempt, remove the board and try again.

5. Use the Installation Tool supplied with the Expansion board to turn the holders in the LOCK direction, so the board will be fastened in place.

fig.00-049c

* When Expansion Board installation is complete, double-check your work.

(To remove the Expansion board, turn the board holders in the UNLOCK direction, and lift up the board using the pro- vided tool. Remove the board and secure the cover plate.)

6. Secure the cover plate using the four screws removed in step 2.

Immediately turn the power off, and request servic- ing by your dealer or qualified Roland service per- sonnel when: Objects (such as screws) have fallen into, or liquid has

been spilled on to the TD-10; or The TD-10 has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has

become wet); or The TD-10 does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance.

Never open the bottom cover of the TD-10 by yourself.

To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity, please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the board. Before you touch the board, always first grasp a metal

object (such as a water pipe), so you are sure that any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged.

When handling the board, grasp it only by its edges. Avoid touching any of the electronic components or connectors.

Removal screws

Board holder

Connector

Expansion board

LOCK

propos des cartes dextension (French language for Canadian Safety Standard)

Les cartes dextension (optionnelles) sont des cartes qui vous permettent daugmenter la puissance de votre systme et dajouter de nouveaux instruments ainsi que des batteries.

* Les cartes dextension de son pour les sries JV/XP de Roland ne peuvent tre utilises.

For a better performance

44

Ninstallez que la ou les carte(s) de circuits imprims spci- fie(s). (WAVE & SYSTEM EXPANSION BOARD srie TDW) Le panneau du dessous du TD-10 a un crneau permettant linstallation des cartes dextension.

1. teignez toujours le TD-10 et dbranchez le cble lec- trique avant toute tentative dinstallation de carte de cir- cuits imprims (WAVE & SYSTEM EXPANSION BOARD srie TDW).

2. Enlevez seulement les quatre vis et ouvrez la plaque situe sous le TD-10.

fig.00-049ae

3. Veillez ce que les supports en plastique pour la carte soient positionns tel quindiqu. Faites-les pivoter si ncessaire.

fig.00-049bf

4. Pendant que vous alignez les trous de la carte au-dessus des supports, insrez dlicatement le connecteur sur la carte dans la prise du TD-10. Assurez-vous que le con- necteur est raccord correctement et que les trois sup- ports sembotent bien dans les trous.

* Ne touchez pas la carte de circuits imprims ni aucun des terminaux de connexion.

* Ne forcez jamais excessivement lors de linstallation dune carte dextension. Si elle ne sajuste pas correctement au premier essai, enlevez-la et recommencez.

5. Pour tourner les supports en position LOCK (verrouill), utilisez loutil dinstallation de la carte dextension fournie cet effet. De cette faon, la carte sera bien fixe sa place.

fig.00-049c

* Lorsque votre installation de la carte dextension est termine, revrifiez-la.

(Pour enlever la carte dextension, faites tourner les supports dans la direction UNLOCK (dverrouill) et soulevez la carte en utilisant loutil cet effet. Retirez la carte et remettez la plaque .)

6. Refermez la plaque en utilisant les quatre vis enleves ltape 2.

Eteignez immdiatement lunit, et contactez le SAV de votre revendeur ou un service de mainte- nance Roland qualifi lorsque : Des objets (vis) sont tombs dans lunit ou du liquide

sest rpandu lintrieur Lunit a t expose la pluie (ou d une faon ou

dune autre a t mouille) Lunit ne semble pas fanctionner normalement ou

montre une altration de ses performances.

Nouvrez jamais vous-mme le capot du dessous du TD-10.

Pour viter dendommager les composants internes par de llectricit statique, suivez attentivement les rgles ci- dessous lorsque vous maniez la carte. Avant de toucher la carte, saisissez toujours un objet

mtallique (tel quun tuyau darrive deau) pour tre sr de vous dcharger de toute lectricit statique.

Quand vous saisissez la carte, ne la prenez que par ses cts. Evitez de toucher ses composants lectroniques ou connecteures.

Vis

Support pour la carte

Prise

Carte dextension

LOCK

Troubleshooting connections and settings This section will discuss points to check if you experience problems while making basic settings, and how to solve those that occur easily when you are using electronic drums for the first time.

Before checking or modifying connections, be sure to turn off the power of all devices.

For troubleshooting of problems that occurred as a result of editing operations, etc., you will need to check your editing, so please refer to Troubleshooting (p. 132) in the Appendices. Also refer to that section if you are using acoustic drums to trigger the TD-10, or if you are using pads made by a manufacturer other than Roland.

NOTE

MEMO

For a better performance

45

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

No sound First, make sure that connections have been made according to the setup on p. 2325, and then check the following points.

No sound when you strike [PREVIEW] Make sure that the [GROUP FADERS] sliders are not low- ered. fig.00-034

[PREVIEW] produces sound, but striking the pads does not.

Check whether the trigger indicator (TRIGGER) lights when you strike a pad. If it doesnt light, check the connections of the pad and TRIGGER INPUT jack.

fig.00-051

You hear sound in the headphones but not from the external amp, etc.

Check the connections with the external equipment,its vol- ume, and make sure that the TD-10s [MASTER] knob is not turned down.

fig.00-052

The wrong pad sounds, or other pads sound inadvertently

Are you using the wrong TRIGGER INPUT jacks? Are the pads fixed firmly in place?

If the attachment of a pad has loosened, it may receive vibrations when a different pad is struck, and trigger sounds unintentionally.

Is a high-volume speaker sounding nearby the pad? Try changing the orientation of the speaker or the pad.

When a pad is struck softly, it does not sound

Did you touch a pad or press a pedal from the time that the TD-10 was powered on until the kit name display appeared? When the power is turned on, the TD-10 checks the pads. If pads are struck during this time, the check cannot be performed correctly.

The volume is too small for the force with which the pads are struck

Are you listening at an appropriate volume? In the case of electronic drums, listening at low volumes may give you the impression that the pad sensitivity is low. If raising the volume (p. 37) does not correct this, then try adjusting the sensitivity (p. 39).

If you are using a PD-5, PD-7, PD-9, PD-100 or PD-120 You can make adjustments for the volume produced relative to the playing velocity (striking force) on the pad. Refer to p. 39 and try making this adjustment.

If you are using pads made by anoth- er manufacturer If when using pads made by another manufacturer, they do not perform satisfactorily, you will need to adjust the trigger parameters. Refer to Basic settings for the trigger parame- ters (BASIC) (p. 109) in the Advanced Use, and make the needed changes or settings.

Specific pads are too loud or too soft

If you are listening in monaural, use the MASTER L (MONO) jack ONLY, and do not insert a plug into the R jack.

Are each of the [GROUP FADERS] sliders in an appropri- ate position? Move all the faders to the same volume,then re-adjust for the desired balance.

Rim shots do not sound Are you using a PD-7, PD-9 or PD-120 pad?

Rim shots cannot be played on other pads. Are you using a monaural cable to connect the pad with

the TD-10? If so, only the head portion will trigger sound. Use the stereo cable included with the PD-7, PD-9 or PD-120.

Are the trigger type settings correct?

Rim shots do not sound cor- rectly

When playing on the PD-7 or PD-9, strike the rim and head simultaneously. Simply striking the rim alone will not produce sound.

Are the trigger type settings correct? If you are using a PD-120 as the snare, check the Rim

Sensitivity setting (p.110).

Volume is low when you play using brushes

Since the impact of a brush is lower than the impact of a stick, you need to use a drum kit that has trigger settings geared for brushes, one displaying a symbol such as the following in the lower right of the KIT display page.

fig.00-053

Strike location is not detected. Are the trigger type settings correct? When using a PD-100 or PD-120, is the head tension

adjusted correctly? When using a PD-7 or PD-9, is the Polarity Switch set to -

(Roland)? Strike location can be detected only for trigger number 2

(SNARE) and trigger number 10 (RIDE).

For a better performance

46

How sounds are created on the V-drums The TD-10 uses a completely new method for generating sounds called Variable Drum Modeling. The concept of this method is to model the important parts or character that makes a drum sound the way it does. This allows editing of parameters that were never available before, thus cre- ating new and personalized sounds.

fig.00-054e

1. Instrument (INST) The materials that make up the drums, their shape, and other elements.

2. Studio (STUDIO) The type, size and construction material of the room in which the drums are played, positions of the ambient mikes, and the type and position of the microphones used to pick up the instruments.

3. Control room (CONTROL ROOM) Here, the finishing touches are made by changing mixer settings such as volume/pan/effect send level/output assignment/EQ/Compressors and digital effects.

The V-drums concept focuses on these three major areas and three dedicated buttons [INST], [STU- DIO] and [CONTROL ROOM] are provided for quick access so your creative aspirations can be immediately translated into reality. As an interface concept for the user, this is also completely new.

Before you actually begin creating sounds, please read the following explanations of some of the preset drum kits. They will lead you through some easy steps to become familiar with the features of an acoustic kit, a kit for brushes, and an electronic kit.

Mixer

Compressor

Equalizer

Effect

Room ambience

Room, Microphone

Room type

Mike setting

Instrument Drum shell

Drum head

Snares

Tuning

Muffling

Mixing

Features of the preset drum kits

47

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

No.36: 70s Rock drum kit This is a rock drum kit with a deep and fat sound. Until now, this type of fatness could never be created or edited in drum modules or samplers. However, since the TD-10 uses a model of an acoustic drum that can be adjusted using the Variable Drum Modeling technology, you can create a sound of your own and one that responds to your natural dynamics. Lets take a look at the instrument parameters of this kit. One of the parameters that creates the rich- ness of the sound is Shell Depth (which adjusts the depth of the drum shell). Lets experiment by changing the shell depth of the snare drum.

fig.00-056

1 Press [KIT].

The DRUM KIT page will appear.

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select kit number 36.

fig.00-057

53

2,6

1

Features of the preset drum kits

48

3 Press [INST], then [F2 (EDIT)], and then press [F1 (SHELL)].

The following screen will appear: fig.00-058

4 Strike the pad that you are using as the snare.

The snare settings display page will appear. In this page you can select the materials and depth of the drum shell. fig.00-059

5 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Shell Depth.

fig.00-060

6 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to change the depth of the shell.

In order to produce a powerful sound, this preset has a setting of 8.0 inches, but lets try changing this to 3.5 inches.fig.00-061

How does it sound? The character has changed considerably, and is much lighter. Strike a tom pad, and try the same adjustment for it.

In order to make the same comparison on acoustic drums, you would two separate drums. Furthermore, previous models of electronic drums had no way to make this adjustment. However on the TD-10, such changes are made with simple front panel operations,letting you create the desired sound in an instant.

Features of the preset drum kits

49

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

No.37: Brush Kit This is a kit for playing with brushes, something that was also not possible with any previous elec- tronic drum system. Compared with stick playing, brush playing uses an extremely delicate trigger signal, so we have provided a kit with special trigger settings. The studio and control room settings are set to take advantage of this delicate character, and emphasize a natural feeling as if the kit were being played right in front of the listener. Listen to what the effect settings are doing. To avoid destroying the nuances of the original sound, effects are being used subtly, and do create a signifi- cant impact on the resonance and tone of the delicate sounds.

fig.00-064

1 Press [KIT].

The DRUM KIT display page will appear.

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select kit number 37.

fig.00-065

3

2

1

4

Features of the preset drum kits

50

3 Press [F3 (FX SW)].

The following screen will appear: fig.00-066

An indication of ON appears above each button [F1][F4], indicating that all effects are being used.

4 Press [F1] and [F4].

Ambiance and Effect will be turned off. fig.00-067

How does it sound? You will notice that the sound has suddenly lost its sense of depth.

Sounds that have a pronounced delicate character respond very sensitively to ambience and rever- beration. In more advanced applications of these settings, you can control the character of ambiance and reverb to simulate the exact acoustic space that you have in mind; for example, a live and spatial character, while at the same muting some of the resonance.

Features of the preset drum kits

51

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

No.38: Electronic drum kit With this kit we can reproduce the electronic drums that were popular in the early 1980s. Previous drum sound modules did not provide for the creation and editing of the unique parameters of an electronic drum. Since the TD-10 provides these parameters and also reproduces tonal changes resulting from changes in velocity (striking force), it gives us powerful electronic sounds with great potentials in todays dance, hip-hop and rap music scenes.

Lets experiment by changing the amount of pitch bend,a function that modifies pitch during the decay (duration) of the sound, and is one feature that characterizes an electronic drum. The pitch bend parameter specifies the amount of pitch change.

fig.00-070

1 Press [KIT].

The DRUM KIT page will appear.

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select kit number 38.

fig.00-071

5

2, 6

1 3

Features of the preset drum kits

52

3 Press [INST], and then press [F2 (EDIT)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-072

4 Strike the pad that is being used as the tom.

The tom setting screen will appear.

5 Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Bend.

fig.00-073

6 While using [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to increase the pitch bend setting, strike the tom pad.

The pitch at the beginning of the note will become higher, and the effect will gradually become more intense.fig.00-074e

Time

Bend

0

127

amount of pitch change

Features of the preset drum kits

53

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

In this section we will start with drum kit number 36, and take you through the process of creating an entirely different kit. Kit number 36 is a distinctive kit intended for rock, but we will turn this into a sharper and more natural-sounding drum kit that might be suitable for fusion, etc. When effects are being used, it will be difficult to hear how the instruments really sound, so lets begin by turning off all the effects.

fig.00-075

1 Press [KIT].

The DRUM KIT page will appear.

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select kit number 36.

fig.00-076

3 Press [F3 (FX SW)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-077

4 Where there is an indication of ON above the [F1][F4] buttons, press the button to turn the indica- tion OFF.

2

1

34

Modifying a drum kit

54

[INST]: Creating drum sounds The settings in this section are for the drums themselves, and they are concerned with the funda- mental elements that determine the character of the sound. Via easy operations you can proceed through the process of selecting an instrument, deciding its material and shape, and adjust the tun- ing, etc.

During the procedures described here, you can use [TRIG SELECT] to select triggers/sounds even if pads are not connected, and use [PREVIEW] to audition the sound.

Selecting an instrument fig.00-080

1 Press [INST].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-081

2 Strike the pad whose instrument you wish to change.

The instrument select page for the specified pad will appear.

3 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a different instrument. Strike the pad as you select differ- ent instruments to hear how they sound.

In this example, lets use 106 Maple1 S as the snare, and edit this to create our sound.

MEMO

3

1

Modifying a drum kit

55

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Modify the material and depth of the body By changing the material of the instrument body and listening to the difference, you can find the sound that you want. This is an editing method that is only possible on the TD-10. Its just like choosing between a variety of real snare drums. Here, lets modify the material and depth of the snare drum body.

fig.00-082

1 Press [INST], then press [F2 (EDIT)], and then [F1 (SHELL)].

2 Strike the pad being used for the snare.

The snare setting display page appears. Here, you can choose the material and depth of the body.fig.00-083

3 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Material.

3,5

1

4, 6

Modifying a drum kit

56

4 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to change the material of the body.

In this example, lets change the setting from Steel to Wood. Of the three types, this will pro- duce the warmest sound.fig.00-084

This completes our selection of the body material. Next we will specify the depth of the body.

5 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Shell Depth.

fig.00-085

6 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the depth of the body.

Since the current setting is a bit deep, lets change this to 3.5". Notice how the body resonance decreases.fig.00-086

Modifying a drum kit

57

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Change the material and tuning of the head Here, lets modify the type and tuning of the snare drum head.

fig.00-088

1 Press [INST], then press [F2 (EDIT)], and then press [F2 (HEAD)].

2 Strike the pad being used for the snare.

The snare setting page appears. Here, you can type and tuning of the head.fig.00-089

3 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Head Type.

4 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to change the type of head.

In this example, lets change the type from Coated to PinStripe. The sound will become thicker, with fewer overtones.fig.00-090

* PinStripe is a registered trademark of Remo Inc. U.S.A.

3,5

4,6

1

Modifying a drum kit

58

This completes the head material choice. Next well tune of the head.

5 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Head Tuning.

fig.00-091

6 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the tuning.

Here we will change the setting from -30 to 0.

Modifying a drum kit

59

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Adjust the muffling (muting) and snare strainer tension You can add muffling to the snare drum or adjust the tension of the snare strainer to reduce unwant- ed overtones or resonances, creating a tighter sound. You can even turn the snares off!

fig.00-093

1 Press [INST], then press [F2 (EDIT)], and then press [F3 (MUFFLE)].

2 Strike the pad being used for the snare.

The snare setting page appear. Here, you can choose the muffling method and snare strainer ten- sion.fig.00-094

3 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Muffling.

3,5

4,6

1

Modifying a drum kit

60

4 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the setting.

For this example, select Dougnuts1. The sound will become somewhat more muted.fig.00-095

This completes the muffling settings. Next we will adjust the tension of the strainer.

5 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Strainer Adj.

fig.00-096

6 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the setting.

For this example, try Loose. Listen to the difference.fig.00-097

Modifying a drum kit

61

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

[STUDIO]: Adjusting the acoustics of the room One very important element that affects the overall sound of a drum kit is the environment in which the drums are placed. The same drums are capable of producing a very different sound, depending on whether they are played in a conventional studio, or in a glass-walled room. Here you can make such variations in room characteristics with the simple touch of a few buttons.

Here we will try editing Ambience, which is part of the Studio settings. First, turn on the Ambiance that you turned off before selecting the instruments.

fig.00-098

1 Press [KIT], and then press [F3 (FX SW)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-099

2 Press [F1] to turn Ambiance ON.

fig.00-100

2

1

Modifying a drum kit

62

Decide where the drums are played You can choose locations for your drums from different types of rooms, a cave, a bathroom or even the beach. You make this selection by seeing the icon that represents the actual acoustical environ- ment. The factory preset will be Gymnasium. Lets change this to Studio. The resonance will change to that of a more muted room.

fig.00-102

1 Press [STUDIO].

The currently selected studio settings will be displayed.

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select Studio.

fig.00-102a

2

1

Modifying a drum kit

63

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Change the size of the room You can modify the ambience space by selecting one of five different room sizes.

fig.00-103a

1 Press [STUDIO], and then press [F2 (ROOM)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-103

2 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Room Size.

3 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the setting.

Small sizes will produce a slight impression of ambient presence, and it will sound as though the drums are being played right in front of your eyes. Larger sizes will produce a more live ambi- ence. Adjust this setting as desired.

3

1

2

Modifying a drum kit

64

[CONTROL ROOM]: Adding finishing touches to the sound Using the equalizer to modify the sound

If you want the selected instrument to sound a little different, such as a bit brighter or a bit lighter, etc., you can use the equalizer to make adjustments. The TD-10 has a 2-band (high and low) equalizer for each instrument, and this can be used to fine tune each sound for the total blend of the kit. This way, you can customize the contrast between individual sounds such as snare and kick for example.

First, turn on the Equalizer that you turned off before selecting the instruments. fig.00-104

1 Press [KIT], and then press [F3 (FX SW)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-105

2 Press [F3] to turn the equalizer ON.

fig.00-106

2

1

Modifying a drum kit

65

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

In this example, lets assume that we want to make the sound of the snare stand out. fig.00-107

1 Press [CONTROL ROOM], press [F3 (EQ)], and then press [F4 (HIGH)]

The following screen will appear:fig.00-108

2 Strike the pad being used for the snare.

The snare setting screen will appear.

3 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the value. For this example, adjust the setting to +5.

fig.00-108

3

1

Modifying a drum kit

66

Adjusting the volume balance of the instruments Now that weve used the equalizer to boost the high range, the snare sounds brighter. With this change, however,the snare might stand out a bit too much. Lets lower the volume to correct the bal- ance.fig.00-110

1 Set each of the [GROUP FADERS] sliders [KICK][SNARE][HI-HAT][OTHERS] to the same volume.

2 Press [CONTROL ROOM], press [F1 (MIXER)], and then press [F1 (VOLUME)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-111

3 Strike the pad that is being used for the snare.

The snare slider will be selected.

4 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to lower the volume slightly.

When setting the volume, make sure that the group faders ([GROUP FADERS]) are all at the same level, and use on-screen editing to adjust the volume balance. If you use this method, the same balance will be reproduced each time you select that kit. It is best to use the group faders when you need to make temporary adjustments to the volume. (they will NOT overwrite settings in the mixer page)

By using the simple procedures that have been introduced above, you can see how the simple and friendly interface allows you to create a wide variety of drum kits, easily accessed by just pushing a button.

4

1 2

MEMO

Modifying a drum kit

67

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

This section will highlight things that are possible only with electronic musical instruments such as the TD-10.

Perform with the on-board sequencer The TD-10 contains a sequencer that can record and play back accompaniment tracks and/or drum performances. The sequencer contains built-in pattern performances (preset patterns). These patterns can be used as a very helpful practice tool.

Playing back a preset pattern Preset patterns 136 will playback several measures repeatedly until [STOP] is pressed. These pat- terns are convenient for drum practicing.

fig.00-114

1 Press [PATTERN].

The number of the currently selected pattern will be displayed.fig.00-115

2 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a pattern.

3 Press [PLAY].

The pattern will begin playing back. Press [STOP] to stop playback, and press it again to return to the beginning of the pattern.

2

1 3

Examples and convenient tips

68

Play the pads along with a preset pattern When you have found a preset pattern that you like, you can play along with that pattern. While sounding the click, adjust the volume balance of the drums, backing parts, and the click.

fig.00-117

1 Adjust the [BACKING] and [CLICK] [GROUP FADERS] lower than the other sliders.

2 Press [CLICK].

The click will begin sounding.

3 As described in Playing back a preset pattern (p. 68), play back the pattern.

4 Gradually raise the [BACKING] and [CLICK] GROUP FADER sliders to adjust the volume balance with the drum kit.

21,4

Examples and convenient tips

69

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Drum Kit ChainSelecting drum kits in the desired order You can choose the order in which drum kits will be selected.

fig.00-120

1 Press [CHAIN], and then press [F1 (C.EDIT)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-121

In this screen, you can create a list to specify the order in which the drum kits will be selected.

2 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the sequence order in which the drum kits will be selected the step number 1 located in the right of the screen. fig.00-121a

3 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the kit that will be selected first.

4 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to 2.

3,5

7

2,41

Examples and convenient tips

70

5 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the kit that will be selected second.

6 In the same way, make settings for the third and subsequent kits.

fig.00-122

To delete an unwanted kit from a step, use [CURSOR] in the CHAIN page to select the kit, and then press [F2 (DELETE)]. If you wish to add a kit between steps, press [F1 (INSERT)].

7 When you finish making the settings, press [EXIT].

You will return to the DRUM KIT CHAIN page.fig.00-122a

In this page you can use [INC/DEC] to select drum kits in the specified order.

To turn off the Drum Kit Chain function, press [CHAIN] to make the button indicator go dark. In addition, you can specify pads or foot switches that can be used to select drum kits easily, even while you continue playing. For details refer to Chapter 9. Operations using pads and foot switches (p. 119) in the Advanced Use.

MEMO

MEMO

Examples and convenient tips

71

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Using a foot switch to select kits When an FS-5U foot switch (optional) is connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack, you can use it to select kits, patterns, or as a play/stop button for patterns (p. 120).

fig.00-123e

The function that the foot switch will have can be selected by the Mode setting in the FOOT SWITCH display (p. 120). fig.00-123a

Using a pad to playback patterns In addition to using pads to play drum sounds, it is also possible to make settings so that striking a pad will start playback of a pattern.(with various possibilities) When this function is used, you can (for example) strike a pad to start playback of a pattern, and then continue playing along with that pattern. This is only possible with electronic drums!

Some of the preset drum kits use this function. For details on the settings, refer to p. 119.

Foot switches FS-5U

F S

-5 U

F S

-5 U

Foot switch cable PCS-31

MEMO

MEMO

Examples and convenient tips

72

Using headphones to hear the click sound If you want to listen to a click sound while you play (for example during practice or a live perfor- mance), you can make settings so that the click is heard only in the headphones, and is not output from the OUTPUT jacks (MASTER).

fig.00-124

1 Press [CLICK], and then press [F2 (INST)].

The following screen will appear:fig.00-125

2 Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Output.

3 Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select Phones Only.

fig.00-126

21

3

Examples and convenient tips

73

Q u ic

k S

ta rt

Using the TD-10 as a MIDI sound module The TD-10 can also be used as a sound module for MIDI keyboards or sequencer. When used as a MIDI sound module, the percussion group (p. 126) can be used so that 72 types of instrument can be accessed simultaneously in addition to the sounds that are assigned to the 12 trigger inputs (pads). In addition, three backing parts can be used as sound sources (each with its own individual MIDI channel) as well as the drums. This means that a single TD-10 can be used as a four-part multi part multi-timbral sound source with 56 voices of polyphony! For details refer to Using the TD-10 as a sound module (p. 125).

Examples and convenient tips

74

Advanced Use

75

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

The TD-10 is a drum trigger interface and sound module, providing virtual reproduction of an actu- al drum set, allowing total control over all aspects of drum sound creation.

When electronic drums were first developed, the technology available was not as advanced as it is today, so sounds were not really comparable with acoustic drums. However, many people appreci- ated electronic drums in their own right for their unique sound quality and character. The early elec- tronic drum systems were fairly expensive, and not that easy to use in a wide musical context. Later, the appearance of samplers (instruments using digital recording technology) brought great advances in the quality of acoustic instrument simulations and editing potential of those sounds. Although this technology was developed mostly for synthesizers, it was also applied to rhythm machines and electronic drums though the operating procedures and the sound creating/editing processes were simply carried over from synthesizers. For many drummers, it became necessary to learn new and unfamiliar technical terms and methods for processing sound, meaning that the user friendliness was considerably diminished.

The TD-10 V-drums offers access to the whole family of percussion sounds, including acoustic and electronic drums, and percussion, and provides a control environment that is specially designed for the drummer. This includes choosing your instrument, (out of over 600 sounds!) editing the sounds, and a way to make sure they respond to your style of playing through the advanced and accurate triggering response. You also have control of where the drums are played, the acoustics of that environment, the types of microphones used on the drums and their positions and all details of the final mixing process in the control room. In other words, the TD-10 alone is a complete drum pro- duction concept with a studio, effect units and a mixing console. There are 50 preset drum kits that have been created in this manner, so you can get a feel of the TD-10s potential once you have com- pleted the basic setup.

How the V-drums system is organized The V-drums system can be divided into the following two parts.

Controllers such as pads and pedals on which you perform The sound module that produces sounds in response to your per-

formance on the pads or pedals fig.01-02e

In this system, the TD-10 is the sound module. When the TD-10 receives signals (trigger signals) received after pads are hit (or via MIDI) it plays the corresponding instrumental sounds.

* The term trigger signal will appear frequently in this manual, so become familiar with the term as it will will help you understand the explanations that follow (p. 172).

Sound module (TD-10)Controller

TRIGGER INPUT Jacks

Instrument (instrumental sound)

Pad

OUTPUT jacks PHONES jack

Chapter 1. Overview of the TD-10 V-drums

76

How to select pads When making settings, you can specify the pad in one of the following two ways.

Using pads to select the pad/sound for editing Strike the head (the head and rim simultaneously) of the pad. The setting display for the pad you struck will appear. Listen to the sound as you strike the head (the head and rim simultaneously), and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the setting.

Using the TD-10 to select the pad/sound for editing Use the 1 button or 12 button located below [TRIG SELECT] to select a trigger signal(corre- sponds to the 12 trigger inputs). To edit the rim settings, press [RIM] to make the indicator light. When using [PREVIEW] to audition a sound, use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to modify the set- ting.

* When separate settings can be made for the head and the rim, a display such as the following will appear. For details refer to p. 136.

fig.01-03

In this owners manual, a symbol such as the following will mark functions that can be set independently for head and rim.

fig.(H)(R)

Head settings Rim settings

Chapter 1. Overview of the TD-10 V-drums

77

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Selecting a kit Press [KIT], and the basic display page will appear. In this page, you can use [INC/DEC],the VALUE dial or a foot switch (optional) to select drum kits (p. 120). fig.02-01

Area 1 in the above figure indicates whether the selected kit contains settings for performance with sticks or for brushes. To change this setting see Making settings for brush perfor- mance (p. 79). Area 2 indicates effect on/off settings for the entire kit. Please refer to Effect switches for the entire kit (p. 79). Area 3 will appear if a card is inserted into the TD-10. If the cards protect switch is on, a lock symbol will appear.

* To prevent data from being accidentally modified while you play, it is a good idea to select this display page once you have finished making settings.

Selecting kits from the list display Here you can select drum kits by accessing the full list of available kits. fig.02-02

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F1 (LIST)]. The DRUM KIT LIST page will appear.

2. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC], or [CURSOR] to select a kit.

Function buttons [F1 (PAGE <)]: The previous page of the list will appear. [F2 (PAGE >)]: The next page of the list will appear.

Naming a kit Each kit can be given a name of up to 8 characters. fig.03-01

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F4 (NAME)]. The DRUM KIT NAME page will appear.

2. Use the left/right [CURSOR] buttons to select the charac- ter that you wish to change.

The character at the blinking location is the one that can be changed.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC], or [CURSOR] (up/down) to change the character.

Characters can be selected in the order of the small charac- ters displayed in the bottom of the screen.

Function buttons In this page the [F1][F4] buttons can be used to perform the following convenient functions for entering characters. [F1 (INSERT)]: All characters to the right of the cursor will

be moved to the right. [F2 (DELETE)]: The character at the cursor location will be

deleted, and all characters to the right of the cursor will be moved to the left.

[F3 (SPACE)]: A blank space will be inserted at the cursor location.

[F4 (CHAR)]: Cycle between uppercase/lowercase/sym- bols.

2

13

Chapter 2. Settings for the entire drum kit

78

Making settings for brush performance For each kit you can specify whether sticks or brushes will be used. When the trigger setting is set to brush, pad sen- sitivity will be higher. Each kit has settings for sticks and for brushes, and the brush settings can be selected as follows. fig.03-02

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F3 (SELECT)]. The SELECT page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select Brushes. The settings for brush performance will be selected.

* Preset drum kits for brushes are already set for brush perfor- mance. The setting discussed here is necessary when you wish to modify a kit that was created for stick performance in order to play with brushes. If you wish to create a new brush kit, its sim- pler to copy an existing one and then edit it as you wish.

* The setting you make here can also be viewed in the drum kit name page (DRUM KIT).

* When performing brush swish/sweeping, the following condi- tions must also be met in addition to the above setting.

Trigger jack 2 must be used. (for the snare drum) PD-120 or PD-100 pads must be used. Make sure that you are using instrument number 113 Brush1 S, number 114 Brush2 S or 115 BrushTmbS.

Effect switches for the entire kit Ambience, compressors, equalizers, and digital effects can be turned on/off for the entire kit. This gives you a great way to compare your sounds with or without those func- tions.

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F3 (FX SW)]. The EFFECTS SWITCH page will appear.

2. Each time you press a function button [F1][F4], the cor- responding effect will be switched on/off.

Function buttons [F1 (AMBNCE)]: Ambience on/off switch [F2 (COMP)]: Compressor on/off switch [F3 (EQ)]: Equalizers on/off switch [F4 (EFFECT)]: Effect on/off switch

* The settings made here can also be seen in the drum kit name page (DRUM KIT).

fig.03-02ae

On Off

Chapter 2. Settings for the entire drum kit

79

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Here you can edit the instruments.(i.e. snare drum kick etc.) The TD-10 provides separate parameters for editing acoustic or electronic drum sounds.

Selecting an instrument

On the TD-10, each sound,is referred to as an instrument (INST). Youll begin the sound-creating procedure by select- ing the desired instruments. fig.04-01

Procedure (Example) Changing the snare

1. Press [INST]. The INST page will appear.

2. Strike the snare pad. The name of the instrument being triggered by the snare pad will appear at Inst. The type of the currently selected instrument will appear at Group.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select an instrument.

* There are instruments that cannot be selected There are some instrument combinations that cannot be selected within the same kit, or with certain trigger inputs. The V-EDIT process is not available for all instruments (p. 136).

Selecting instruments from the list display Here you can choose the sound from the list of all instru- ments. fig.04-02

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F1 (LIST)]. The INST LIST page will appear.

2. Strike the pad whose instrument you wish to change. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear. The cur- sor will be at the name of the currently selected instrument.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC] or [CURSOR] to select an instrument.

4. After you have selected an instrument, press [EXIT]. You will return to the INST page.

Function buttons [F1 (PAGE <)]: The previous page of the list will appear. [F2 (PAGE >)]: The next page of the list will appear.

You can also use the Function Key to scroll through the instrument list at a higher speed. To advance quickly Hold down [F2 (PAGE >)] and

press [F1 (PAGE <)] To move in reverse quickly Hold down [F1 (PAGE <)] and

press [F2 (PAGE >)]

* Instruments which cannot be selected for specific triggers are indicated by a horizontal line as in the following diagram.

fig.04-03e

Instruments which cannot be selected

Chapter 3. Instrument settings

80

Editing an acoustic drum kit (V-EDIT)

V-EDIT and EDIT Editing procedure for an acoustic snare, kick and tom drums will differ depending on the type of instrument and the TRIGGER INPUT jack that you are using.

1.V-EDIT lets you use all the editing capability of the TD-10 2.EDIT lets you edit only the two parameters Pitch and Decay

VERY IMPORTANT!! When V-EDIT can be used V-EDIT will appear ONLY when using trigger inputs 16 and an instrument from instrument groups V-KICK, V-SNARE, or V-TOM. (A V-EDIT symbol will appear in the setting page.) When an instrument from another instrument group is assigned, only Pitch and Decay can be edit- ed. So if you assign a V type sound to an input other than 1-6, you cannot use the V-Edit parame- ters. For details on assigning instruments, refer to p. 136. The parameters available in V-EDIT will differ depending on the trigger input and instrument selected. The following parameters can be edited.

Trigger Shell Material Shell Depth Head Type Head Tuning Muffling Strainer Adj. 1 (KICK) - o o o o - 2 (SNARE) o o o o o o 36 (TOM) - o o o o -

o: Can be set - : Cannot be set

Selecting the shell material Changing the material of the snare drum shell produces a different tone. You can select one of three materials: wood, steel and brass.

fig.04-04

Instruments that can be edited Snare only

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F2 (EDIT)]-[F1 (SHELL)]. The INST EDIT page will appear.

2. Strike the snare pad. The snare setting page will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Material.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Material: Wood, Steel, Brass

Wood: Wood body. This produces a natural and mellow sound. Steel: Steel body. This produces a sound with metallic resonance. Brass: Brass body. This produces the unique resonance of brass.

Chapter 3. Instrument settings

81

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Changing the shell depth Changing the depth of the drum shell will change the tone. With the snare drum, the depth can be changed over 39 steps, from 1 to 20 inches! Making the shell deeper will increase the richness of the low range, and make the sound more fat. fig.04-05

Instruments that can be edited Kick, Snare, Tom

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F2 (EDIT)]-[F1 (SHELL)]. The INST EDIT page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Shell Depth.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Shell Depth: Normal, Deep (Kick)

120 inch (39 steps) (Snare) Normal, Deep (Tom)

Selecting the head material Changing the type of drum head will affect aspects of attack and tone. You can choose from three type of heads: Clear, Coated, and PinStripe

fig.04-06

Instruments that can be edited Kick, Snare, Tom

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F2 (EDIT)]-[HEAD(F2)]. The INST EDIT page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Head Type.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Head Type: Clear, Coated, PinStripe

Clear: A single transparent head. Coated: The most commonly used type of head. PinStripe: Characterized by a rich medium and low range

color.

* PinStripe is a registered trademark of Remo Inc. U.S.A.

Tuning the head Here you can tune the drum head very accurately. fig.04-07

Instruments that can be edited Kick, Snare, Tom

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F2 (EDIT)]-[F2 (HEAD)]. The INST EDIT page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Head Tuning.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Head Tuning: -480+480 (-4+4 octaves)

* For some instruments, raising or lowering the value beyond a certain point may not produce further change.

Chapter 3. Instrument settings

82

Muffling settings (muting) You can literally apply tape or rings to dampen the over- tones. fig.04-08

Instruments that can be edited Snare, Kick, Tom

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F2 (EDIT)]-[F3 (MUFFLE)]. The INST EDIT page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Muffling.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Muffling: OFF, Tape 1, Tape 2, Blanket, Weight (Kick)

OFF, Tape 1, Tape 2, Doughnuts 1, Doughnuts 2 (Snare) OFF, Tape 1, Tape 2, Felt 1, Felt 2 (Tom)

OFF: No muffling. Tape 1: one piece of tape. Tape 2: two pieces of tape. Blanket: Muffled by placing a blanket inside the kick

drum. Weight: Blanket with a weight on top. Doughnuts 1: common ring type mute. Doughnuts 2: common ring type mute with stronger muf-

fling of overtones. Felt 1: Conventional felt type mute. Felt 2: Conventional felt type mute with more pres-

sure on the head.

Adjusting the Snare strainer tension

The amount of contact between the bottom head and the snares themselves can be adjusted to change the tone just like with a real acoustic drum. You have a choice between one of three tensions: Loose, Medium or Tight or you can turn the snares OFF. fig.04-09

Instruments that can be edited Snare only

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F2 (EDIT)]-[F3 (MUFFLE)]. The INST EDIT page will appear.

2. Strike the snare pad. The snare setting page will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Strainer Adj.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Strainer Adj.: OFF, Loose, Medium, Tight

OFF: The sound with no snares. Loose, Medium, Tight: The strainer tension becomes progressively stronger.

Chapter 3. Instrument settings

83

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Editing an electronic drum kit (V-EDIT) Electronic drum sounds consist of tone and noise. These instruments can be assigned only to specific trigger inputs. For details on instrument assignments, refer to p. 136.

* With electronic drums, selecting an instrument for the head will assign the same instrument to the rim. It is not possible to change the rim to a different instrument.

fig.04-10

IMPORTANT: Instruments that can be used for specific trig- ger inputs Instruments from the ELEC instrument group can be used ONLY with trigger inputs 16. Example: An Electronic Kick can only be used with the trigger input (1) dedicated for the Kick.

Procedure 1. Press [INST]. The INST page will appear.

2. Strike a pad that is connected to a TRIGGER INPUT jack (1-6).

The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select an instru- ments from the ELEC instrument group.

4. Press [F2 (EDIT)]. The setting page for the selected instrument will appear.

5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

* You can also use the [F1][F4] buttons to select parameters.

[F1]: Atk [F2]: Each time the button is pressed, Tone or Noi will be

selected. [F3]: Each time the button is pressed, Dcy or Bal will be

selected. [F4]: Bend

6. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Instruments from the ELECTRONIC instrument group provide the following parameters.

Atk (Attack Level ): 0127 Adjusts the volume of the attack (the beginning of the sound).

Tone (Tone Pitch ): 0127 Adjusts the pitch of the tone component.

Noi (Noise Pitch): 0127 Adjusts the pitch of the noise component.

Dcy (Decay): 0127 Adjusts the decay time of the sound.

Bal (Noise Tone Balance): 0127 Adjusts the volume balance between the noise and tone components.

Bend (Pitch Bend): 0127 Adjusts the extent of the pitch change that occurs during the sound. This setting adjusts the pitch at which the sound begins. fig.00-074e

Time

Bend

0

127

amount of pitch change

Chapter 3. Instrument settings

84

Editing a TR-808/909 (V-EDIT) This simulates a Roland TR-808 or TR-909 Rhythm Composer. Only instruments specified for each trigger input can be selected. For details on instrument assignments, refer to p. 136.

* For instruments in the TR-808/909 groups, selecting an instrument for the head will assigns the same instrument for the rim. Its not possible to change the rim to a different instrument.

fig.04-12

Instruments and parameters usable for each trigger input Instruments in the TR-808 or TR-909 instrument group can be used only for trigger inputs 16. Specific trigger jacks are used for specific instruments, such as a kick instrument for the kick jack. The following parameters can be edited.

* The [F2][F4] buttons can be used to select parameters.

TR-808 Trigger [F2] [F3] [F4] 1 (KICK) Tune Decay Tone 2 (SNARE) Tune Snappy Tone 36 (TOM14) Tune Decay -

TR-909 Trigger [F2] [F3] [F4] 1 (KICK) Tune Decay Attack 2 (SNARE) Tune Snappy Tone 36 (TOM14) Tune Decay -

Procedure 1. Press [INST]. The INST page will appear.

2. Strike a pad connected to a TRIGGER INPUT jack 16. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the TR-808/909 instrument.

4. Press [F2 (EDIT)]. The setting page for the selected instrument will appear.

5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

6. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Attack (Attack Level): 0127 Adjusts the volume of the attack (the beginning of the sound).

Tone (Tone Pitch): 0127 On the TR-808/909, this parameter simulated the brightness of the drum.

Snappy: 0127 This is the TR-808/909 parameter that simulates snare strainer tension.

Decay (Decay Time): 0127 Adjusts the decay time of the sound.

Tune: 0127 On the TR-808/909, this parameter simulated the tension of the drum head. The pitch and thickness of the sound will change.

Chapter 3. Instrument settings

85

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Editing hi-hat, cymbals and percussion Only pitch and decay can be edited for instruments that are assigned to trigger inputs 712. Even for trigger inputs 1-6, only pitch and decay can be edited if the assigned instru- ment is not V-EDIT capable. fig.04-14

Procedure 1. Press [INST]. The INST page will appear.

2. Strike a pad connected to a TRIGGER INPUT jack 712. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a hi-hat, cym- bal or percussion instrument.

4. Press [F2 (EDIT)]. The setting page for the selected instrument will appear.

5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

6. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Pich: -480+480 Adjusts the pitch of the sound.

Decay: -31+31 Adjusts the decay time of the sound.

* For some instruments, raising/lowering the value beyond a cer- tain level will not produce any further change in Decay.

Chapter 3. Instrument settings

86

Here is where you can virtually change the acoustics of the room in which you are playing the drums. The parameters available here let you select actual room sizes and wall mate- rials to easily get your desired sound. You can also change the positions of the room microphones. An easy way to understand this is to change the type of stu- dio as explained below in Selecting the studio/room in Settings for the entire drum kit.

Settings for the entire drum kit Selecting the studio/room You can select one of 10 types of ambiences built into the TD-10. Before you make detailed settings, use this setting to select the basic type of acoustic environment in which you will be playing. fig.00-102a

Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]. The STUDIO page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Studio Select: Beach, Living Room, Bath Room, Studio,

Garage, Locker Room, Theater, Cave, Gymnasium, Dome Stadium

Changing the size of the room You have five sizes to choose from. fig.05-02

Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F2 (ROOM)]. The ROOM page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Room Size.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Room Sizes: Tiny, Small, Medium, Large, Huge

Changing the wall material You can choose from Wood, Plaster or Glass covered walls for the room where the drums are being played. fig.05-03

Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F2 (ROOM)]. The ROOM page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Wall Type.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Wall Type: Wood, Plaster, Glass

Wood: Simulates the sound of a wood-walled room pro- ducing a warm sound.

Plaster: Simulates a plaster-walled room producing a more naturally live sound.

Glass: Simulates a glass-walled room producing a very bright ambience.

Selecting the ambience mike location

Ambience microphones are placed at a distance from the instrument in order to pick up the natural acoustics of the room. Adjusting the height of these mikes allows you to cap- ture different characteristics of that room. fig.05-04

Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F3 (AMBMIC)]. The AMBIENCE MIC page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Chapter 4. Studio settings

87

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Parameters Ambience Mic Positions: Low, High

Low: Often referred to as floor mikes, picking up low frequencies of the room, producing a warmer charac- ter.

High: Often referred to as overhead mikes capturing the high frequencies and accenting the brightness of the room.

Adjusting the volume and output assignments of the ambience

fig.05-05

Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F4 (AMBNCE)]-[F3 (AMBLVL)]. The AMBIENCE page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the output destina- tion that you wish to set (MASTER, DIR1, DIR2, DIR3 ).

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. If you want the ambience to be output ONLY from a specific output, raise the value for that output and set a value of 0 for the others.

Parameters Ambience Output Level: 0127

MASTER: Adjusts the level of ambience output from the MASTER jacks.

DIR1: Adjusts the level of ambience output from the DIRECT 1 jacks.

DIR2: Adjusts the level of ambience output from the DIRECT 2 jacks.

DIR3: Adjusts the level of ambience output from the DIRECT 3 jacks.

* Consider that Ambience is like an effect used with a mixing con- sole and that these parameters correspond to the Return Level (the amount that is sent from an effect back to the mixer).

Settings for each instrument About the basic procedure In each page,when you hit the pad for which you wish to make settings, the setting page for that pad will appear. You can also make a selection by pressing [TRIG SELECT] on the TD-10 itself.

Adjusting the amount of ambience

fig.05-06

Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F4 (AMBNCE)]-[F1 (AMBSND)]. The AMBIENCE page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The cursor will move to the slider of the pad that you struck.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC] or [CURSOR] to make the setting.

Parameters Ambience Send Level: 0-127

* If you consider Ambience as a type of effect used with a mix- ing console, this parameter corresponds to the Send Level (the amount that is sent from the mixer to the effect or in this case,the room youve selected).

Selecting the type of mike and its location

Here you can choose the type of mike used on certain instru- ments and its relative position to that instrument. fig.05-07

* This parameters not available for electronic drums, TR-808/909 kits, cymbals or percussion.

Microphone settings can be made for the following trigger inputs.

Trigger number Mic type Mic location 1, 2 (KICK, SNARE) o o 36 (TOM14) - o 712 - -

o: Can be set - : Cannot be set

Chapter 4. Studio settings

88

Selecting the type of mike Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F1 (MIC)]. The MIC page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck appears.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Mic Type.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Mic Type: Condenser, Dynamic 1, Dynamic 2 (KICK)

Condenser, Dynamic, Lo-Fi (SNARE)

(KICK) Condenser: Produces the sound of a condenser mike. Dynamic 1: Produces the sound of a standard dynamic

mike. Dynamic 2: Produces the sound of a dynamic mike that has

the mid-to-high-range content emphasized somewhat.

(SNARE) Condenser: Produces the sound of a condenser mike. Dynamic: Produces the sound of a dynamic mike. Lo-Fi: Emphasizes low range and is a bit dirty.

Specifying the mike placement Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F1 (MIC)]. The MIC page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck appears.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Mic Position.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Mic Position: Outside, Standard, Inside

Outside: Placed to capture more attack. Standard: Standard mike location for a natural sound. Inside: Produces less attack and a bit more body of the

drum.

Settings for each group Settings can be made for the three main instrument groups: the drum kit,the percussion group, and the backing parts.

* The percussion group is a sound map that can be accessed when the TD-10 is being used as a MIDI sound module. For details refer to Using the percussion group (p. 126). Of course, indi- vidual percussion sounds CAN be assigned to the pads.

Adjusting the amount of ambi- ence send level for each group

The ambience can be adjusted by groups: the drum kit, the percussion group (p. 126), and the backing part group. Its a convenient way to raise or lower the overall amount of ambience without adjusting individual ambience send levels for the instruments.

Procedure 1. Press [STUDIO]-[F4 (AMBNCE)]-[F2 (GRPSND)]. The AMBIENCE page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the group for which you wish to make settings (DRUMS, PERC, PART ).

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Ambience Group Send: 0127

DRUMS: Adjusts ambience send level for the entire drum kit.

PERC: Adjusts ambience send level for the entire percus- sion group.

PART: Adjusts ambience send level for the sequencer parts (Part 1, Part 2, and Bass part).

Chapter 4. Studio settings

89

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

The most important aspect of finalizing the sound in record- ing or live performances depends on the mixing console. In the Control Room, youll find a complete 12-channel mixer with 10 individual compressors and EQs and digital effects, finalizing your sound in a CD-quality state.

Abbreviations in the display screen TRIGGER INPUT jacks

K=Kick Sn=Snare T1=Tom 1 T2=Tom 2 T3=Tom 3 T4=Tom 4 HH=Hi-hat C1=Crash 1 C2=Crash 2 Rd=Ride cymbal A1=AUX1 A2=AUX2

Settings for each instrument The basic procedure In each page, strike the pad for which you wish to make set- tings, and the setting page for that pad will appear. You can also use [TRIG SELECT] to make your selection by.

Adjusting volume (level)

This adjusts the volume of each pad. fig.06-01

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F1 (VOLUME)]. The VOLUME page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The cursor will move to the slider of the pad that you struck.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC] or [CURSOR] to make the setting.

Parameters Volume: 0127

Adjusting pan (stereo location) This adjusts the stereo location of each pad. fig.06-02

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F2 (PAN)]. The PAN page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The cursor will move to the slider of the pad that you struck.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC] or [CURSOR] to make the setting.

Raising the slider (pressing [INC]) will move the sound toward the right, and lowering it (pressing [DEC]) will move the sound toward the left.

Parameters Pan: L15CenterR15

Adjusting effect send level

This sets the effect Send Level for each pad/sound. fig.06-03

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]-[F1 (FXSEND)]. The EFFECT page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The cursor will move to the slider of the pad that you struck.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC] or [CURSOR] to make the setting.

Parameters Send Level: 0127

Chapter 5. Control room settings

90

Selecting output assignments To change the output destination for the sound of each pad note that the vertical lines indicate the TRIGGER INPUT number, and the horizontal lines indicate the OUTPUT choices. The black dots indicate the OUTPUT assignment corresponding to each sound. fig.06-04

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F3 (OUTPUT)]. The OUTPUT page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The cursor will move to the vertical line (TRIGGER INPUT jack) of the pad that you struck.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC] or [CURSOR] to make the setting.

Abbreviations in the display screen OUTPUT jacks

M=MASTER 1=DIRECT 1 2=DIRECT 2 3=DIRECT 3

* The volume of the DIRECT 1, DIRECT 2 and DIRECT 3 jacks is not affected by the master volume control located in the upper right of the front panel ([MASTER]).

Applications You can also use the DIRECT outputs (6) in mono by select- ing (for example) DIRECT 1, and then panning the chosen sound hard right or left (R15/L15) (stereo location; p. 90). If you are processing all sounds externally, you can also use the MASTER out in this way, giving you 8 individual mono outs.

Output Separation: 76 dB (min.) (MASTER L -> DIRECT L, MASTER R -> DIRECT R): 45 dB (min.) (DIRECT L -> Other DIRECT L, DIRECT R -> Other DIRECT R): 45 dB (min.)

Controlling variations in volume (Compressor)

10 compressors are provided (Triggers 1-10 only) Compression is used to smooth volume peaks, preventing overloads and as it will also change the character and tone of the sound in response to the playing dynamics, its anoth- er useful tool in creating YOUR sound. fig.06-05

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F2 (COMP)]. The COMPRESSOR/LIMITER page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. In this page, [F1] will turn the compressor on/off. Also, pressing the [F2][F3][F4] buttons will move the cursor direct- ly to Attack, Release, or Output.

Parameters

ATTACK (Attack time): 0.0550 msec Adjusts the volume of the attack (the beginning of the sound).

RELEAS (Release time): 0.052000 msec Adjusts the release time of the sound.

OUTPUT (Output Level): -60 +12 dB Adjusts the volume of the sound processed by the compres- sor. Ideally the volume should be about the same whether the compressor is on or off.

Threshold (Threshold): -, -990 When the input exceeds the level that you specify here, the compressor will begin to hold down the volume.

Ratio (Compression Ratio): 1:190:1, :1 This decides the degree of volume compression, expressed as a ratio relative to the original (input) sound.

Chapter 5. Control room settings

91

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Customizing the tone (Equalizer) Here you can adjust the high and low frequencies balance for the instrument assigned to each pad. (TRIGGERS 1-10 only)

* This setting is not available for the AUX1,2 trigger inputs. fig.06-06

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F3 (EQ)]. The EQ page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. In this page, [F1] will turn the equalizer on/off. Pressing [F3] or [F4] will move the cursor directly to the low range (LOW) or high range (HIGH) settings.

Parameters TYPE: Peak, L shelv, H shelv

Peak: The vicinity of the specified frequency range will be boosted/cut.

L shelv: The entire range below the specified frequency will be boosted/cut.

H shelv: The entire range above the specified frequency will be boosted/cut.

Q: 0.5, 1.020, 1.0 steps Adjusts the width of the frequency range that will be boost- ed/cut. For example, when the Q value is small, raising or lowering the low range GAIN will affect a broad area extending close to the high range.

FREQ (Frequency): 2020 kHz Adjusts the point at which the boost/cut will occur.If you wish to boost/cut a range that is higher than the current range, you would adjust this setting.

GAIN: -150+15 dB Adjusts the amount of the boost/cut. Negative (-) settings produce a cut.

GAIN

Frequence

FREQ

HShelvLShelv Peak

Q

0

0

Chapter 5. Control room settings

92

Settings for the entire drum kit Adjusting effect Return level You can adjust the effect Return level for the drum kit, per- cussion group, and backing parts.

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]-[F2 (SNDRTN)]. The EFFECT GROUP page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Return Level

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Return Level: 0127

Selecting the type of effect The TD-10 provides 30 different types of digital effects that are easy to select with the simple push of a button. You can also edit these effects. Refer to Editing the effects (p. 94). fig.06-08

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]-[F3 (FXTYPE)]. The EFFECT TYPE page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to where the effect name is displayed.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Hall Reverb 1, 2, 3 Room Reverb 1, 2, 3 Plate Reverb 1, 2, 3 These are high quality digital reverbs similar to what you find in dedicated effects modules. Hall and Room Reverbs are more conventional types while Plate simulates the prede- cessors of digital effects, where a metal plate was actually used. Try them to hear the differences.

Gate Reverb 1, 2, 3 Non Linear 1, 2 These effects cut off the reverberation before its natural decay, and have broad applications as the sound will change in different ways over time for Gate Reverb and Non Linear. fig.06-09e

Delay 1, 2 A repeating-type effect is produced. By changing the time difference between the left and right delays, you can spread out the left/right width of the delayed sound.

Beat Delay 1, 2 This produces a delay that is synchronized to the tempo of the sequencer. This differs from Delay 1, 2 in that the delay time can be specified in terms of note values. For example with a setting of 16 (16th note), the delay time will always be a 16th note length even if you change the tempo of the sequencer.

Chorus Delay 1, 2 Delay is combined with a chorused sound.

Chorus: An effect that adds smoothness and spaciousness to the sound

Delay: A repeating-type effect

Flanger Delay 1, 2 Delay is combined to a flanged sound.

Flanger: An effect that adds a jet airplane nuance Delay: A repeating-type effect

Phaser Delay 1, 2 Delay is applied to a phased sound.

Phaser: An effect that gives a twisting character to the sound

Delay: A repeating-type effect

Pitch Shift Delay 1, 2 These are delays with pitch change.

3D-Delay 1, 2, Flying 3D-Delay 1, 2 3D-Delay adds a sense of spaciousness to the delay sound. Flanging 3D-Delay produces an effect in which the delay sound appears to rotate front/rear and left/right.

* Listen in a stereo environment to appreciate this 3D-Delay or Flying 3D-Dealy effect. For the speaker placement locations, refer to p. 95.

Gate Non Linear

Time

Level

Chapter 5. Control room settings

93

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Editing the effects Heres how to set the parameters for each effect type. Its best to use Ambience to create the basic overall sound of the drum kit, and then use the digital effects to enhance specific sounds. To adjust the depth for each instrument, refer to p. 90. fig.06-10

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]. The EFFECT TYPE page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters for Hall Reverb 1, 2, 3 / Room Reverb 1, 2, 3 / Plate Reverb 1, 2, 3 Reverb Time: 0.125 (sec) The length of reverberation.

Pre Delay: 0200 (ms) Adjust the time until the reverb begins to sound. This is a small and precise adjustment and will appear to affect the fatness of the reverb, rather than being felt as a change in the reverb decay time.

High Cut Freq: 50020k (Hz) Adjust the tone of the reverb to make it brighter/darker. Lowering this frequency will cut more of the high range, making the sound darker.

Spread: 015 Adjust the left/right spread of the reverb. Higher settings will create a more obvious spread in the sound.

Parameters for Gate Reverb 1, 2, 3 / Non Linear 1, 2 Gate Time: 10400 (ms) Adjust the length of the reverb.

Pre Delay: 0200 (ms) Adjust the time until the reverb begins to sound. This is a small and precise adjustment and will appear to affect the fatness of the reverb, rather than being felt as a change in the reverb decay time.

High Cut Freq: 50020k (Hz) Adjust the tone of the reverb to make it brighter/darker. Lowering this frequency will cut more of the high range, making the sound darker.

Density: 0127 Adjust the fatness of the reverb. Higher settings produce a fatter (denser) reverb.

Parameters for Delay 1, 2 Delay Time: 01200 (ms) Adjust the time from the original sound until the delay is heard.

Shift: L12000R1200 (ms) Adjust the time difference between the left and right delays. For example: if Delay Time is set to 400ms, setting Shift to L100ms will cause the right channel delay to remain at 400ms and the left channel delay will sound at 400+100=500ms. You can not make settings that would cause the sum of Delay Time and Shift to be greater than 1200ms.

Feedback Level: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay effect repeats.

High Damp Freq: 50020k (Hz) Adjust the tone of the delay to make it brighter/darker. Lowering this frequency will cut more of the high range, making the sound darker.

Parameters for Beat Delay 1, 2 Delay Time: 16, 8T, 16F, 8, 4T, 8F, 4, 2T, 4F, 2 Specify the note value at which the delay will repeat.

Delay Time values 16: 16th notes 8T: 8th note triplets 16F: dotted 16th notes 8: 8th notes 4T: quarter note triplets 8F: dotted 8th notes 4: quarter note 2T: half-note triplets 4F: dotted quarter note 2: half note

Shift: L2, L4F, L2T, L4, L8F, L4T, L8, L16F, L8T, L16, 0, R16, R8T, R16F, R8, R4T, R8F, R4, R2T, R4F, R2

Specify how much the right or left channel delay will be later than the Delay Time. For example if Delay Time is set to 16 (16th note) and Shift is set to L16 (left channel delayed by a 16th note), the right channel delay will be heard at 16th note timing, and the left channel will be heard one 16th note later than this. You can not make settings that would cause the sum of Delay Time and Shift to be greater than 1200ms.

Feedback Level: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay repeates.

High Damp Freq: 50020k (Hz) Adjust the tone of the delay to make it brighter/darker. Lowering this frequency will cut more of the high range, making the sound darker.

Chapter 5. Control room settings

94

Parameters for Chorus Delay 1, 2 Rate: 0.110.0(Hz) Adjust the modulation frequency of the chorus. Higher set- tings produce faster modulation.

Depth: 0127 Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus. Higher settings produce a stronger effect.

Delay Time: 0500 (ms) Adjust the time from the original sound until when the delay is heard.

Delay Feedback: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay repeats.

* If you wish to use only the chorus, set Delay Time and Delay Feedback to 0(off).

Parameters for Flanger Delay 1, 2 Rate: 0.110.0 (Hz) Adjust the modulation frequency of the flanger. Higher set- tings produce faster modulation.

Depth: 0127 Adjust the depth of the flanger. Higher settings increase the effect.

Delay Time: 0500 (ms) Adjust the time difference from the original sound until the delay is heard.

Delay Feedback: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay repeats.

* If you want to just use the flanger, set Delay Time & Delay Feedback to 0.(off)

Parameters for Phaser Delay 1, 2 Rate: 0.110.0 (Hz) Adjust the modulation frequency of the phaser. Higher set- tings produce faster modulation.

Depth: 0127 Adjust the modulation depth of the phaser. Higher settings produce a stronger effect.

Delay Time: 0500 (ms) Adjust the time from the original sound until the delay is heard.

Delay Feedback: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay effect repeats.

* If you wish to use just the phaser effect, set Delay Time & Delay Feedback to 0.

Parameters for Pitch Shift Delay 1, 2 Pitch Shift: -120+12 (semitones) Specify the amount of pitch change. A setting of +1 raises the pitch a semitone, and +12 raises the pitch one octave.

Delay Time: 0500 (ms) Adjust the time from the original sound until the delay is heard.

Feedback Level: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay repeats. With set- tings of 2 or more times, the pitch-shifted sound will be pitch-shifted again, meaning that the pitch will rise (or fall) by the specified Pitch Shift amount each time the delay repeats.

High Cut Freq: 50020k (Hz) Adjust the tone of the delay to make it brighter/darker. Lowering this frequency will cut more of the high range, making the sound darker.

Parameters for 3D-Delay 1, 2 Delay Time: 01200 (ms) Adjust the time from the original sound until the delay is heard.

Shift: L12000R1200 (ms) Relative to the Delay Time, you can lengthen the time until the right or left channel delay is heard. For example if Delay Time is set to 400ms, setting Shift to L100ms will cause the right channel delay to remain at 400ms and the left channel delay will sound 100 ms later. You can not make settings causing the sum of Delay Time and Shift to be greater than 1200ms.

Feedback Level: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay effect repeats.

Speaker Angle: 090 Leaving the actual speaker locations as they are, you can adjust Angle in the following diagram to change the direc- tion from which the sound is heard. fig.06-11e

30 30

Angle Angle

Direction from which the sound is heard

Actual speaker locations

Chapter 5. Control room settings

95

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Parameters for Flying 3D-Delay 1, 2 Delay Time: 101200 (ms) Adjust the time from the original sound until the delay is heard.

Feedback Level: 0127 Adjust the number of times that the delay repeateds.

Rotation: -1500 +150 (R.P.M) (steps of 3) Specify the number of rotations per minute. Positive (+) set- tings rotate toward the right, negative (-) settings rotate toward the left.

High EQ Gain: 0 +10 This is an equalizer that is applied only to the delay sound.

Settings for an entire group Broad Settings can be made for the entire drum kit, backing parts, or percussion group.

* The percussion group is a sound map that can be accessed when the TD-10 is being used as a MIDI sound module. For details refer to Using the percussion group (p. 126). Of course, indi- vidual percussion sounds CAN be assigned to the pads.

Adjusting effect send level for an entire group

You can adjust the overall amount of effect send level for the drum kit, percussion group (p. 126), and backing parts.

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]-[F2 (SNDRTN)]. The EFFECT GROUP page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the group (Drums, Perc, or Part) for which you wish to make settings.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Group FX Send: 0127 Drums: The amount of effect send level for the entire drum

kit. Perc: The amount of effect send level for the entire per-

cussion group. Part: The amount of effect send level for the sequencer

parts (part 1, part 2, bass part).

Adjusting the volume by group You can adjust the overall volume of the drum kit and per- cussion group.

Procedure 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F4 (GRPVOL)].

The GROUP VOLUME page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the group for which you wish to make settings (DRUMS or PERC ).

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Group Volume: 0127 DRUMS: Adjusts the volume of the entire drum kit. PERC: Adjusts the volume of the entire percussion group.

Chapter 5. Control room settings

96

The TD-10s sequencer consists of four parts (like 4 tracks). The Drum part is used to record/ play back performance from the pads or an external MIDI controller. There are three other parts for melodic instruments: Part 1, Part 2 and the Bass part. A set of performances for each of these four parameters is collectively referred to as a pattern. The Preset patterns (150) contain pre-recorded perfor- mances for each part and can be used for listening, or as a practice/performance tool. Preset patterns cannot be erased (p. 104) or recorded over. The User patterns (51100) can be used for recording. In order to record melodic instruments on Part 1, Part 2 and the Bass part, you will need to use an external MIDI keyboard. Recording the Drum part can be done from the pads or an external MIDI controller.

Basic sequencer operation The SEQENCER buttons located on the front panel are used to perform basic operations and access the setting pages. Pressing [PATTERN] will call up the basic display page of the sequencer. fig.07-01

[PATTERN]: Select patterns. This is the basic display page for the sequencer.

[PART]: Make settings for each Part. [TEMPO]: Set the Tempo. [CLICK]: Turn the click sound on/off. [STOP]: Pressing this will stop playback. Pressing it

once again returns you to the beginning of the song.

[PLAY]: Start sequencer playback. [REC]: Access the recording setting page, and enter

record-standby mode. fig.07-01ae

[CURSOR]: Press the left button to rewind, and the right button to fast-forward. Press the up button to move to the beginning of the pattern, and the down button to move to the end.

For details on the operation of each button, refer to the explanations that follow.

Using Preset Patterns It is not possible to modify the settings of a preset pattern. If you attempt to modify the settings when a preset pattern is selected, the following display will appear. fig.07-01a

Although the settings can be modified temporarily, the origi- nal settings will return when you select another pattern. If you wish to modify the settings of a preset pattern, you must first copy the preset pattern to a User pattern (p. 104).

Setting the tempo Setting the tempo for each pattern When a pattern is selected, the tempo you specify here will be set automatically.

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F2 (SETUP)]. The PATTERN SETUP page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Pattern Tempo.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to set the tempo.

Parameters Pattern Tempo: 20260

Temporarily changing the tempo of the currently-playing pattern

You can change the tempo of the pattern that is currently being played back. When you select a different pattern, this tempo change will be canceled.

Procedure 1. Press [TEMPO]. The TEMPO page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to set the tempo.

Parameters TEMPO: 20260

Beginning of pattern

Ending of pattern

Go forward one measureGo back one measure

Chapter 6. Sequencer

97

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Playback functions Selecting a pattern

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN].

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a pattern.

About the screen display fig.07-02

1. Currently selected pattern number 2. Currently playing measure number. 3. Indicates the beat. 4, 5 show the status of settings that were made in other set- ting displays. 4. Indicates the playback method setting. 5. Indicates the part mute status (p. 107).

* Function buttons [F1][F4] are used for various functions as explained below.

Selecting patterns from the list Like the PATTERN page, here you can select patterns from a list of names. From the left, this indicates pattern name (Name), time sig- nature (Beat), measure length (Len), and pattern type (Type). fig.07-03

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F1 (LIST)]. The PATTERN LIST page will appear.

2. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC] or [CURSOR] to select a pattern.

Function buttons [F1 (PAGE )]: The previous page of the list will appear. [F2 (PAGE )]: The next page of the list will appear. [F3 (MEMORY)]: This indicates the remaining amount of

memory and the number of patterns. [F4 (NEW)]: The empty pattern will be selected.

Selecting how a pattern will playback

There are three different ways to make a pattern play back. Loop: The pattern will playback, repeating until you

press [STOP]. One Shot: The pattern will playback once and then stop. Tap: See (p. 119), This allows you to play back a pat-

tern note by note (step by step) (You can press [PLAY] to audition this.)

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F3 (TYPE)]. The PATTERN TYPE page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Play Type.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Play Type: Loop, One Shot, Tap

Ways to use this function Loop: Loop is useful for practicing and live perfor-

mance.

One Shot: One Shot is also a great live performance fea- ture. With Loop and One Shot-each time you hit the pad to which the pattern is assigned, it will automatically start from the beginning of the pattern. Its a good idea to actually try this out to see for yourself. You can use an empty pattern assigned to a pad to function as a stop switch for a pattern trig- gered from another pad.

* QuickPlay is a supplementary function for Loop and One Shot. QuickPlay starts playback of the pattern from the first note (first event) even if when you recorded the pattern, you left a pause at the beginning. For example if you had just played/recorded freely,ignoring the tempo clock.

1 2 3

4 5

Chapter 6. Sequencer

98

Tap: This function is a great performance tool! For example if you specify Tap for a pattern which contains a melody line and assign this pattern to a pad, you can play the notes of the melody in order each time you strike the pad. You can set the Reset Time so that the pattern will automatically return to the beginning if that time interval elapses without that pad being hit again. For example, you can play a bass line with your kick drum and the two sounds will be perfectly tight.

* Reset Time (Off, 0.14.0 seconds)

This is the time interval that resets the pattern being used. If it is set to Off, this function will be disabled.

Click settings Click on/off and volume settings When you press [CLICK], the click will be turned on/off. To adjust the volume, move the [GROUP FADERS] slider [CLICK].

Setting the tempo While pattern playback is halted, you can use the click as a metronome. But if a different pattern is selected, the tempo will change to the tempo specified for that pattern.

Procedure 1. Press [TEMPO]. The TEMPO page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to set the tempo.

Parameters TEMPO: 20260

Setting the time signature and click interval

Procedure 1. Press [CLICK]-[F1 (INTRVL)]. The CLICK page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

* It is not possible to change the time signature of the click while a pattern is playing back. The click corresponds to the time signa- ture of the pattern.

Parameters Time Signature: Numerator = 013 (number of beats per

measure), Denominator = 2, 4, 8, 16 (basic note value)

Interval: 1/2 (half note), 3/8 (dotted quarter note), 1/4 (quar- ter note), 1/8 (eighth note), 1/12 (12th note), 1/16 (16th note)

Chapter 6. Sequencer

99

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Selecting the click sound You have a choice of sixteen sounds including a human voice!

Procedure 1. Press [CLICK]-[F2 (INST)]. The CLICK page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Inst.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Inst: Voice, Click, Claves, Wood Block, Triangle, Cowbell,

Conga, Talking Drum, Maracas, Cabasa, Cuica, Agogo, Tambourine, Snaps, 909 Snare, 808 Cowbell

Using ambience You can also send the click sound to the ambience used in the current kit.

Procedure 1. Press [CLICK]-[F2 (INST)]. The CLICK page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Ambience Level.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Ambience Level: 0127

Using effects You can also send the click sound to the effect in use, and sometimes this makes it more comfortable to listen to. When using this, make sure that the master effect switch is ON (p. 41).

Procedure 1. Press [CLICK]-[F2 (INST)]. The CLICK page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to FX Send Level.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters FX Send Level: 0127

* The effect is the one assigned to the kit ([CONTROL ROOM]- [F4 (EFFECT)]).

Adjusting the pan (stereo location)

You can set the pan position of the click. But if you have cho- sen headphones (Phones Only) as the output destination, the click will be located in the center regardless of this setting.

Procedure 1. Press [CLICK]-[F2 (INST)]. The CLICK page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Pan.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. L15 is far left, Center is center, and R15 is far right.

Parameters Pan: L15CenterR15

Selecting the output destination You can select the output for the click. (Master and/or Headphones only)

Procedure 1. Press [CLICK]-[F2 (INST)]. The CLICK page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Output.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Output: Master, Phones Only

Master: Output from the MASTER OUT and PHONES jacks.

Phones Only: Output only from the PHONES jacks.

Chapter 6. Sequencer

100

Recording Performance on the pads or on an external MIDI keyboard can be recorded. On the TD-10, your performance will be recorded exactly as you play it, including hi-hat control pedal movements and Positional Sensing.

* Brush swish/sweeping and choke (p. 35) cannot be recorded.

* Please keep in mind that even though there are 50 user patterns, the amount of memory available will be determined by how much data is recorded into each pattern.

Basic recording procedure The procedure is the same when recording with pads or with a MIDI keyboard.

1.Select an empty pattern fig.07-05

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F4 (NEW)]. An empty pattern is automatically selected.

* If all of the patterns have been used,this cant be selected. Refer to Clearing a pattern (p. 105) and erase an unwanted pattern before you record.

2.Set the time signature and the num- ber of measures

fig.07-06

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F2 (SETUP)]. The PATTERN SETUP page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Time Signature: Numerator = 113, Denominator = 2, 4, 8, 16 Length (bars): 199

* When the denominator is 16, you cannot set a numerator of from 1 through 3. Also, with a denominator of 8, a numerator of 1 cannot be set.

* If you are using Replace recording (p. 102), it is not necessary to specify the Length. Recording will continue until you press [STOP], and the number of measures recorded will automatical- ly become the Length setting.

If you are recording from the pads, disregard paragraphs 3 and 4 of this section.

3.Select a MIDI channel Be sure that the transmit channel on your keyboard corre- sponds to the MIDI channel of the part you wish to play/record.

Each of the 4 parts has its own MIDI channel. The factory preset channels are as follows:

All Drums = MIDI 10 Part 1 = MIDI Ch 5 Part 2 = MIDI Ch 6 Bass Part = MIDI Ch 2

(You can change the MIDI channels if you wish-Press [SETUP], then [F2 (MIDI)].)

4.Select an instrument fig.07-07

Procedure 1. Press [Part]-[F1 (INST)]. The PART INST page will appear.

2. Press [F1][F3] to select the part that you wish to record. The [F1][F3] buttons select Part 1, Part 2, and Bass part respectively.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to INST.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a backing instrument or drum kit.

Chapter 6. Sequencer

101

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

5.Specify the recording method fig.07-09

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[REC]. The REC STANDBY page will appear. 2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Rec Mode.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the recording method.

Parameters Rec Mode: Loop All, Loop 1, Loop 2, Loop 4, Loop 8,

Replace

Loop All: The entire pattern will be repeated, and on each pass your performance will be added, (over- dubbed) and mixed with what you did previous- ly.

Loop 1, Loop 2, Loop 4, Loop 8: This determines the length of the section you are recording, and 1,2,4 or 8 measure sections will repeat.

Replace: Recording will continue until you press [STOP]. Any previously recorded data for all Parts will be erased.

6.Set the tempo fig.07-10

Procedure 1. Press [TEMPO]. The TEMPO page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to set the tempo.

7.Record Procedure 1. In record-standby mode (the REC STANDBY page),

press [PLAY]. Recording will begin.

2. When you finish recording, press [STOP].

The Rehearsal function During recording you can press [REC] to switch between recording and rehearsal modes. This allows you to try out different sounds,fills or phrases without stopping the play- back of the sequencer.

Procedure 1. Begin recording.

2. During recording, press [REC]. The [REC] indicator will begin blinking. In this condition, your performance on the pads (or MIDI keyboard) will not be recorded.

3. Press [REC] once again to return to recording mode.

Using a count-in You can set a count-in (1 or 2 measures) to be heard before playback or recording.

Procedure 1. Press [CLICK]-[F3 (COUNT)].

2. If you want a count-in for playback, select PLAY. For recording, select REC.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters PLAY: OFF, 1 meas, 2 meas REC: OFF, 1 meas, 2 meas

OFF: Playback/recording will begin without a count-in. 1 meas: Playback/recording begins after a 1-measure count-

in. 2 meas: Playback/recording begins after a 2-measure count-

in.

Start recording the moment that you strike a pad

This function starts the recording process the instant you strike a pad.

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[REC]. The REC STANDBY page will appear and you are in record-standby mode as the click starts to play.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Hit Pad Start.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to turn the setting ON.

Usage In record-standby mode, recording starts the instant you strike a pad.

Chapter 6. Sequencer

102

Correcting timing as you record (Quantize)

Quantize is a function that corrects inaccuracies of timing while you record. Specify the basic note value before you begin recording,and your performance will be quantized automatically to the set interval. fig.07-11

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[REC]. The REC STANDBY page appears and youre in record- standby mode as the click starts to play.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Quantize.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Quantize: (8th note), (8th note triplets), (16th

note), (16th note triplets), (32nd note), (32nd note triplets), (64th note), OFF

Importing data from another sequencer into the TD-10

Data created on another sequencer can be imported via the MIDI IN and recorded on the TD-10s sequencer. The three melodic tracks and one drum track can be imported simulta- neously. You will need to make settings for MIDI channels and MIDI synchronization.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]. The MIDI page will appear.

2. Set the MIDI channel of the TD-10 to match the MIDI channel of the transmitting device (refer to p. 124).

3. Press [PATTERN]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The PATTERN GLOBAL page will appear.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select Auto.

5. Press [PATTERN]-[REC]. The REC STANDBY page appears and youre in record- standby mode as the click starts to play.

6. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Rec Mode.

7. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to Replace.

8. Begin playback on the transmitted device. The TD-10 will begin recording in synchronization.

9. When the portion to be imported has been recorded, stop playback on the external sequencer and the TD-10 will stop recording.

Editing a pattern Naming a pattern Each pattern can be given a name of up to 8 characters.

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F4 (NAME)]. The PATTERN NAME page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] (left/right) to select the character you wish to change. The blinking location is the character that can be changed.

The blinking location is the character that can be changed.

3. Use the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC], or [CURSOR] (up/down) to change the character.

Characters can be selected in the order shown in the bottom of the screen.

Function buttons In this page, the [F1][F4] buttons perform convenient func- tions for entering characters. [F1 (INSERT)]: All characters to the right of the cursor will

be moved to the right. [F2 (DELETE)]: The character at the cursor location will be

deleted, and all characters to the right of the cursor will be moved to the left.

[F3 (SPACE)]: A blank space will be inserted at the cursor location.

[F4 (CHAR)]: Cycle between uppercase/lowercase/sym- bols.

Chapter 6. Sequencer

103

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Erasing a pattern This function erases ONLY the performance data; other set- tings (such as the number of measures and the time signa- ture) stay the same. fig.07-12e

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F3 (EDIT)]-[F1 (ERASE)]. The ERASE PATTERN page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Pattern.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a pattern number.

4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Part.

5. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the part that you wish to erase.

6. Press [F4 (ERASE)] A confirmation display will appear.

7. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the data will be erased from the selected pattern. (Press [F1(CANCEL)] to return to the previous page without executing the operation.)

Erasing selected measures of a pattern

Performance data can be erased from specified measures of a part or pattern. The erased portion will become blank mea- sures allowing you to re-record in the same area fig.07-13e

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F3 (EDIT)]-[F1 (ERASE)]-[F3 (MEAS)]. The ERASE PATTERN MEASURE page will appear.

2. Select the portion you wish to erase. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the various settings.

From the left, the display indicates the pattern, part, first measure, and last measure.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

4. Press [F4 (ERASE)] A confirmation display will appear.

5. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the data will be erased from the specified area (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the pre- vious page without executing the operation.)

Copying a pattern fig.07-14

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F3 (EDIT)]-[F2 (COPY)]. The COPY PATTERN page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Src.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the copy source pattern.

4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Dst.

5. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the copy des- tination pattern.

6. Press [F4 (COPY)] A confirmation display will appear.

7. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the selected pattern will be copied. (If you press [F1(CANCEL)], you will return to the previous page without executing the operation.

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 Blank measures

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 Blank measures

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

Src

Dst

Chapter 6. Sequencer

104

Copying selected measures of a pattern

You can copy selected measures of a part or pattern. Unlike copying an entire pattern, settings such as instrument and part volume etc. will not be copied; only the performance data will be copied. fig.07-15

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F3 (EDIT)]-[F2 (COPY)]-[F3 (MEAS)]. The COPY PATTERN MEASURE page will appear.

2. In location A of the screen, select the data you wish to copy. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the various settings.

From the left, the display will indicate the pattern, part, first measure, and last measure.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the settings.

4. In location B of the screen, select the copy destination. Use [CURSOR] to move to the various settings.

The display indicates the pattern number, track, and starting measure.

* Beginning at the first measure which you specify here, the num- ber of measures that the copy source occupies will be overwrit- ten.

5. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the settings.

6. Press [F4 (COPY)] A confirmation display will appear.

7. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the specified portion of perfor- mance data will be copied. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page without executing the opera- tion.)

Clearing a pattern This operation deletes ALL data from a pattern, returning all parameters (time signature,length, tempo) to their default values. fig.07-15ae

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F3 (EDIT)]-[F3 (CLEAR)]. The CLEAR PATTERN page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the pattern number that you wish to clear.

3. Press [F4 (CLEAR)] A confirmation display will appear.

4. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the contents of the selected pat- tern will be erased. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page without executing the operation.)

Clearing selected measures of a pattern

This operation lets you clear (delete) selected measures in a pattern. After executing CLEAR, the length of the pattern will become shorter. fig.07-15b

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F3 (EDIT)]-[F3 (CLEAR)]-[F3 (MEAS)]. The CLEAR PATTERN MEASURE page will appear.

2. Select the pattern and measures that you wish to clear. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the various set- tings.

From the left, the display indicates the pattern, the first mea- sure, and the last measure.

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

Src

Dst

A B

1 2 3 4 5 6

1

(Part settings to their default values.)

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4

Chapter 6. Sequencer

105

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the settings.

4. Press [F4 (CLEAR)] A confirmation display will appear.

5. Press [F4 (EXEC)]and the contents of the selected mea- sures will be cleared. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page without executing the operation.)

Connecting two patterns This operation connects two patterns to create one pattern. The pattern specified as Dst will be first, and the pattern specified as Src will be connected to it. The new pattern will be created in Dst. fig.07-16

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F3 (EDIT)]-[F4 (APPEND)]. The APPEND PATTERN page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Src.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the pattern that will come later.

4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Dst.

5. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the pattern that will come first.

6. Press [F4 (APPEND)] A confirmation display will appear.

7. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the patterns will be connected as specified above. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page without executing the operation.)

* If the result of connecting the patterns would exceed 99 mea- sures, the display will indicate 99 MEASURE MAXIMUM, and the APPEND operation will not be executed.

Settings for part instruments * Drum part settings cannot be made here. These settings are

made in the Control Room of the drum kit. (refer to p. 9096). fig.07-17

Adjusting the master tuning Here you can adjust the overall tuning for Part 1, Part 2, and the Bass part.

Procedure 1. Press [PART]-[F3 (M TUNE)]. The MASTER TUNE page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Master Tune: 415.3466.2, 0.1 Hz steps

* Pressing [F4 (440 HZ)] will set this to standard pitch (440.0 Hz).

Instrument selection and set- tings for each part

Here you can select the instrument that will be used by each part, and make settings for Ambience, Key Shift (pitch adjustment in semitone steps) and Bend Range.

Procedure 1. Press [PART]-[F1 (INST)]. The PART INST page will appear.

2. Press [F1][F3] to select the part that you wish to set. The [F1][F3] buttons select Part 1, Part 2, and the Bass part respectively.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Inst: 154 Select the instrument that you wish to use.

Ambience: 0127 Adjust the amount of ambience.

Keyshift: -240+24 Specify a pitch change in semitone steps.

Bend Range: 0+24 Specify the maximum pitch change (in semitone steps) that will occur when pitch bend messages are received.

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Dst

Dst

Src +

APPEND

Chapter 6. Sequencer

106

Mixer settings for each part Procedure 1. Press [PART]-[F2 (MIXER)]. The mixer setting page will appear.

2. Press [F1][F4] to select the parameter that you wish to set.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the part that you wish to set.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters VOLUME ([F1]): 0127 Adjusts the volume.

PAN ([F2]): L15CENTERR15 Adjusts the left/right(pan) position of the sound. L15 is far left, C is center, R15 is far right.

* If you have chosen headphones (Phones Only) as the output des- tination, the sound will be located in the center regardless of this setting.

FXSEND ([F3]): 0127 Adjusts the effect send level.

OUTPUT ([F4]): MASTER, PHONES Select the output destination of the sound. The sound cannot be output from the DIRECT 1, 2, 3 outputs.

MASTER: Output from the MASTER OUT and PHONES jacks

PHONES: Output only from the PHONES jacks

Muting a specific part Procedure 1. Press [PART]-[F4 (MUTE)]. The PART MUTE page will appear.

2. Press [F1][F4] to turn muting on/off. The [F1][F4] buttons correspond to Part 1, Part 2, Bass part, and the Drum part. Muting will be switched on/off each time you press the button.

Chapter 6. Sequencer

107

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Changing output assign- ment for audio received by the MIX IN jack Selecting the output destination of the sound input from the MIX IN jack.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F3 (CTRL)]-[F4 (OPTION)]. The OPTION page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Mix In Output.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Monitor Mix In: Master, Phones Only Master: Output from the MASTER output and the

PHONES jack. Phones Only: Output only from the PHONES jack.

Specifying the type of pad So that the TD-10 will be able to accurately receive the sig- nals from the pads or pedals, use the following settings to specify the type of pads that you are using. In addition to the content covered in Specify the pads that the TD-10 will use (p. 29) of the Quick Start, the section below will discuss Trigger Banks, and how to use acoustic drums with triggers or pads made by other manufacturers. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F1 (BANK)], and the following setting page will appear. fig.08-01

What is the Trigger Type? So that optimal settings can be made for each pad being used, you need to specify the type of pads being used. Indications such as 3 PD7 in the above display correspond to this. This indication means a PD-7 pad is being used for TRIGGER INPUT number 3.

What is a Trigger Bank? Trigger Banks allow you to store the 12 trigger settings as a single unit of information. The large number at the left edge of the above display is the Trigger Bank number. Move the cursor to this area to select the Trigger Bank.

Procedure fig.08-02e

1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F1 (BANK)]. The TRIGGER page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to a location other than BANK.

3. Strike the pad for which you wish to set the Trigger Type. The cursor will move to the trigger number of the pad that you hit.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. Refer to the following table, and specify the type of pad.

Display Model used PD5 PD-5 PD7 PD-7 PD9 PD-9 12A PD-120 (Strike location is detected) 12B PD-120 (Strike location is not detected) 10A PD-100 (Strike location is detected) 10B PD-100 (Strike location is not detected) KD7 KD-7/KD-5 P1, P2 When using a pad made by another manu-

facturer K1, K2 When using a kick pad made by another

manufacturer

* If you want the tone to be affected by the strike location on a PD- 100/120, select 10A/12A. The 10B/12B does not detect the strike location, but more rapid trigger response can be achieved.

* If you wish to make even more detailed settings, refer to the explanation in the following section Basic settings for the trig- ger parameters (BASIC). Normally you dont need to adjust these parameters, but you may use them if you wish to make more accurate settings for your playing style.

* Use the KIK, SNR, TOM, and FLR settings when you use acoustic drums to sound the TD-10. For details refer to p.142.

* When using a pad made by another manufacturer, first select PD7 and try playing the pad. If, with this setting, the pad striking force does not produce a stable volume, try a setting of P1. A setting of P2 will be even more stable, but since the Scan Time (p.111) will be even longer, the interval from when the pad is struck until the sound is heard will be slightly (approximately 0.003 seconds) longer. (For a kick, select KD7, and if the result is not stable, try K1 or K2.)

Model name

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

108

Basic settings for the trig- ger parameters (BASIC) When you are using pads made by other manufacturers, try adjusting the following parameters.

Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of the pad to regulate the pad response.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F2 (BASIC)]. The TRIGGER BASIC page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Sensitivity.

3. Strike the pad for which you wish to make settings. The setting display for the pad you struck will appear, and an input indicator will move in the lower part of the screen.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. Adjust the Sensitivity value so that the strongest strikes cause the input indicator to reach nearly all the way to the maximum level (far right). Increasing this value will raise the sensitivity.

Parameters Sensitivity: 116

Threshold This setting allows a trigger signal to be received only when the pad is struck harder than a specified force. This helps prevent unintentional triggering caused by vibrations that reach a pad when an adjacent pad is hit. In the following example, signal 2 will sound, but signals 1 and 3 will not sound. fig.08-04e

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F2 (BASIC)]. The TRIGGER BASIC page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Threshold.

3. Strike the pad for which you wish to make settings. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear, and an input indicator will move in the lower part of the screen.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. Gradually raise the Threshold value until the kind of unin- tentional triggering shown above no longer occurs. However if this value is raised too far, playing softly on the pad will not be detected. Check this and adjust accordingly. Repeat this process until you get the perfect setting for your playing style.

Parameters Threshold: 015

Curve This is another fine adjustment of sensitivity other than the Trigger Sensitivity parameter, controlling the relation between the velocity (striking force) and changes in volume (the dynamic curve) Adjust this curve until the response feels as natural as possible.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F2 (BASIC)]. The TRIGGER BASIC page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Curve.

3. Strike the pad for which you wish to make settings. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear, and the input indicator will move.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Curve: Linear, EXP1, EXP2, LOG1, LOG2, Spline, Loud1,

Loud2

Linear: This is the normal setting when using a PD-7, PD-9, PD-100 or PD-120, and produces the most natural correspondence between velocity and volume change.

fig.08-06ae

2 31

Threshold Level

Linear striking force

lo ud

ne ss

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

109

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

EXP1, EXP2: Compared to Linear, a wider volume change will occur for stronger hits.

fig.08-06be

LOG1, LOG2: Compared to Linear, wider volume change will occur for softer hits.

fig.08-06ce

Spline: Variation in striking force will produce extreme change.

fig.08-06de

Loud1, Loud2:Variation in striking force will produce little change, and a constant volume will be main- tained. When using drum triggers, these set- tings help maintain stable levels.

fig.08-06ee

Head Tension Adjustment The Head Tension Adjustment parameter regulates the fol- lowing two adjustments for the PD-100 and PD-120. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F4 (OPTION)] and the setting page will appear.

* The setting page for this setting will appear only if the Trigger Type (p. 108) is set to 10A or 12A for trigger number 2 (SNARE) and trigger number 10 (RIDE).

Adjust the head to an even tension This setting allows the strike location to be accurately detect- ed. For the procedure refer to p. 31.

Adjust the tension of the head Adjusting the Head Tension Adjustment value to the stan- dard value of Normal will provide an average head ten- sion. If you wish to loosen this, select Loose. To tighten it, select Tight. Then refer to the procedure of p. 32. and adjust the tension.

* Unlike tuning an acoustic drum, this setting will not affect the pitch. It affects only the tension of the head. But this is VERY important to achieve the best results for positional sensing, and to make sure that the head tension is even. For tuning the pitch of the sound, refer to p. 82.

Parameters Head Tension Adjustment: Loose, Normal, Tight

Rim Sensitivity When a PD-120 is used with trigger number 2 (SNARE), you can adjust the sensitivity of the rim. Higher settings will increase the sensitivity of the rim. With a setting of Off, only the head will sound.

Procedure 1. Set the trigger type to 12A. For this setting, refer to p. 108.

2. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F4 (OPTION)]. The TRIGGER OPTION page will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Rim Sensitivity.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Rim Sensitivity: Off, 115

* Increasing the value excessively may cause the rim instrument to sound as well when the head is struck.

EXP1 EXP2 striking force

lo ud

ne ss

LOG2LOG1 striking force

lo ud

ne ss

Spline striking force

lo ud

ne ss

Loud1 Loud2 striking force

lo ud

ne ss

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

110

Detailed settings for the trig- ger parameters (ADVNCD) The following parameters (ADVANCED EDIT) are automat- ically set to the most efficient values for each pad when you select the Trigger Type (p. 108), and dont require adjust- ment, except if you experience any of the problems that are discussed in the explanation of each parameter. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F3 (ADVNCD)] and the setting page will appear.

Scan Time Since the rise time of the trigger signal waveform may differ slightly depending on the characteristics of each pad or drum trigger (drum pickup) (TSC-10: optional), you may notice that identical hits (velocity) may produce sound at different volumes. If this occurs, you can adjust the Scan Time so that your velocity of playing can be detected more precisely.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F3 (ADVNCD)]. The TRIGGER ADVANCED page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Scan Time.

3. Hit the pad for which you wish to make settings. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. While repeatedly hitting the pad at a constant force, gradual- ly raise the Scan Time value from 0.0 msec, until the result- ing volume stabilizes at the loudest level. At this setting, try both soft and loud strikes, and make sure that the volume changes appropriately. If the Scan Time setting is excessively high, there will be a longer delay until the note is heard, so set this to as low a value as possible.

Parameters Scan Time: 04.0ms (0.1ms steps)

* The SCAN TIME setting is automatically set to the most effi- cient values for each pad when you select the TRIGGER TYPE (p. 108). If you have lowered the SCAN TIME, the head tension adjustment (p.110) does not work correctly.

Retrigger Cancel (RetrigCancel) fig.08-07

Sometimes in the case of a snare drum or other drum to which an acoustic drum trigger is attached, sound will occur at point A (as desired) but will also occur again at point B (undesired) due to distortions in the waveform. This is called retriggering, and occurs in particular at the decay- ing edge of the waveform. Retrigger Cancel detects such dis- tortion in and prevents retriggering from occurring.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F3 (ADVNCD)]. The TRIGGER ADVANCED page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to RetrigCancel.

3. Hit the pad (or acoustic drum if using triggers) for which you wish to make settings and the setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to adjust the setting. While repeatedly striking the drum, raise the RetrigCancel value until retriggering no longer occurs. Raising this value will strengthen retrigger canceling, but will also mean that notes may be lost during fast playing (a drum roll for exam- ple) Set this to as low a value as possible.

Parameters RetrigCancel: 116

A

B

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

111

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Mask Time (MaskTime) On a kick pad, for example, if the beater bounces back and strikes the pad a second time immediately after the intended stroke - (or,like with acoustic drums if you leave the bass drum beater against the head) this can cause a single strike to double trigger. (two sounds instead of the intended one) The Mask Time setting helps to prevent such prob- lems. Once a pad has been hit, any additional trigger signals occurring within the specified MaskTime (064 msec) will be ignored.

* Playing electronic bass drum triggers requires that you realize this-as laying into the head, as you might do with a real bass drum, will not work here, and can cause this double triggering problem. This occurs most often with the bass drum trigger. With other pads, it only occurs if you leave the stick pressing against the head immediately after hitting it. Though technology today can perform many miracles, you still have to play with good technique.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F3 (ADVNCD)]. The TRIGGER ADVANCED page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to MaskTime.

3. Hit (or kick) a pad for which you wish to make settings and the setting page for that pad appears.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. While playing the kick pad, try kicking and leaving the beat- er against the pad. If you hear the second note being trig- gered, raise the MaskTime. But in doing so, it also means that if you play very fast, certain notes may be lost. It may be easier for you to understand how mask time works by using a snare or tom pad, and playing a single handed buzz stroke. Raise the mask time to see how it affects this tech- nique.

* Never forget that your own playing technique has a lot to do with these potential problems.

Parameters MaskTime: 064 ms (4 ms steps)

Crosstalk When two pads are mounted on the same stand, the vibra- tion produced by hitting one pad may trigger the sound from another pad unintentionally. (This is called crosstalk.) The Crosstalk setting lets you prevent such problems. Normally this wont happen if the pads are not too close to each other and mounted on a solid stand. Playing technique is also an influence.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F3 (ADVNCD)]. The TRIGGER ADVANCED page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Crosstalk.

3. Hit the pad for which you wish to make settings and the setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to adjust the setting. If for example,if when hitting a tom pad, the ride cymbal also sounds,then raise the Crosstalk setting for the ride cym- bal pad from Off through 30, 40 ... until crosstalk no longer occurs. As this value is raised, the ride cymbal pad will be less prone to receive crosstalk from other pads. Increasing the Crosstalk value may cause a different prob- lem when playing two pads simultaneously, as the pad receiving the weaker hit may fail to respond. So be careful and set this parameter to the minimum value required to prevent such crosstalk. With a setting of Off, crosstalk pre- vention does no function.

Parameters Cross Talk: OFF, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80

The order in which trigger parameters should be set when using drum triggers If you are using drum triggers, make settings following the sequence given below to ensure the best results. For details on each parameter, refer to p. 109112.

Procedure 1. Refer to the explanation on p. 108 and select the Trigger

Type.

2. Set the Threshold and Curve parameters to normal val- ues.

Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F2 (BASIC)] to access the setting page. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameters, and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the follow- ing settings.

Threshold: 0 Curve: Linear

3. Sensitivity In the setting page of step 2, use [CURSOR] to move the cur- sor to Sensitivity. Make settings so that the input indicator in the left part of the display reaches the maximum level when the pad is struck strongly. The settings below can be made in the setting page accessed by pressing [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F3 (ADVNCD)].

4. Scan Time Strike the head several times with the same force, and adjust this parameter if the volume is uneven.

5. Retrigger Cancel (RetrigCancel) This prevents multiple notes from sounding when a drum is struck once (mainly for a snare drum or toms).

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

112

6. Mask Time Mainly for bass drums so please refer to the explanation above.

7. Crosstalk Same principle as with using pads as as explained above. Once again, press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F2 (BASIC)] and the setting page will appear.

8. Threshold If notes are unintentionally sounded even after you have adjusted the Crosstalk setting, adjust the Threshold. If this parameter is raised excessively, playing softly may NOT trigger the TD-10, so keep the value as low as possible.

9. Curve If changes in playing dynamics do not produce a natural change in the volume of the TD-10 instrument, adjust this parameter.

Adjusting the brightness of the display The display contrast is strongly influenced by the location of the TD-10 and the lighting of the room its in. Adjust this parameter when needed.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F3 (CTRL)]-[F3 (DISPLY)]. The DISPLAY CONTRAST page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

* OR You can do this by holding down [KIT] and rotating the VALUE dial.

Setting the master equalizer The master equalizer allows balancing the high, mid, and low frequencies.

* This equalizer is not applied to the sound which is output from the DIRECT 1, 2, 3 jacks.

fig.08-08

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F4 (MAS EQ)]. The MASTER EQ page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the frequency you wish to adjust.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. In this page, [F1] will switch the equalizer on/off. Pressing [F2][F3][F4] will move the cursor directly to the low (LOW), mid (MID), and high (HIGH) settings respectively.

Parameters The following parameters can be set for each of the three points (low, mid, high).

GAIN: -150+15 Specify the amount of boost/cut. Negative (-) settings will produce a cut.

FREQ (Frequency):20500 (Low), 1004k (Mid), 50020k (High)

Select the frequency you wish to boots or cut. The following parameter can be set only for the mid range.

Q: 0.5, 1.020 (1.0 steps) Adjust the width of the frequency range. Depending on the Q value, raising the GAIN may boost both the low and high ranges.

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

113

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Saving data to a memory card An optional memory card (M-512E) can be used to save TD- 10 settings and sequencer data.

* The Roland M-512E is the ONLY memory card which can be used.

About the Protect switch When the protect switch of the M-512E is turned on, it will not be possible to write data from the TD-10 to the memory card. Normally you should leave the protect switch turned on, and turn it off only when you wish to write data into the card. fig. protect.e

When using a card for the first time When a card is being used for the first time, or if the card has been used by another device, you must execute the follow- ing procedure to initialize the card. (This prepares the card for use with the TD-10.)

* When a card is initialized, all data on that card will be lost. Make sure that it does not contain data you wish to keep for another device.

1. Press [KIT]. The DRUM KIT page will appear.

2. Set the protect switch located at the top of the memory card to the Off position.

3. Insert the memory card into the MEMORY CARD slot located on the rear panel.

The INITIALIZE CARD page will appear. fig.08-10

4. Press [F4 (INIT)]. A confirmation display will appear.

5. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the memory card will be initialized. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page with- out carrying out the operation.)

Saving data to a memory card All data (drum kits, patterns, percussion group, and setup) will be saved.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F4 (UTIL)]-[F1 (SAVE)]. The Save to CARD page will appear.

2. Move the protect switch on the memory card to the OFF position.

3. Insert the memory card into the MEMORY CARD slot located on the rear panel.

* If you insert a card being used for the first time or a card that has been used by another device, the INITIALIZE CARD page will appear. Refer to When using a card for the first time and initialize it.

4. Press [F4 (SAVE)]. A confirmation display will appear.

5.Press [F4 (EXEC) ] and the data will be saved to the memory card. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the pre- vious page without executing the operation.)

* You can also save individual kits to a memory card. To do so, use the Copy function (p. 117).

OffOn

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

114

Loading data from a memory card Data saved on a memory card can be loaded into the TD-10.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F4 (UTIL)]-[F2 (LOAD)]. The LOAD from CARD page will appear.

2. Insert the memory card into the MEMORY CARD slot.

3. Press [F4 (LOAD)]. A confirmation display will appear.

4. Press [F4 (EXEC)]and the data will be loaded from the memory card. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the pre- vious page without excecuting the operation.)

* You can also load individual kits from a memory card. To do so, use the Copy function (p. 117).

Automatically switching the display (Note Chase) When editing sounds, the TD-10s display will switch corre- sponding to the sound that is used when a pad is hit (or when a MIDI message is received). This function is called Note Chase. Note Chase will always be ON for notes that are struck on a pad. This function can be turned off for notes received from MIDI IN.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The MIDI GLOBAL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Note Chase.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to turn the setting on/off.

* Note Chase will NOT function while the INTERNAL sequencer is playing.

Chapter 7. Settings for the entire TD-10

115

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Selecting kits in the desired order (Drum Kit Chain) Specifying a Drum Kit Chain This allows you to step through the drum kits of your choice and in the order you want. (via the INC/DEC buttons or footswitch operation). TD-10 lets you create and store 16 dif- ferent chains of up to 32 steps each. fig.09-01e

fig.09-02

Procedure 1. Press [CHAIN]-[F1 (C EDIT)]. The CHAIN EDIT page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the large number (the chain number) in the left of the display.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the chain number you wish to work on.

4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the step number within the selection sequence, shown at the right of the page.

5. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the drum kits in the order in which you wish to play them.

Function buttons [F1 (INSERT)]: Inserts the kit after the cursor location, mov-

ing the subsequent items of the chain one step toward the end.

[F2 (DELETE)]: Deletes the kit at the cursor location, moving the subsequent items of the chain one step toward the beginning.

[F3 (NEXT)]: Advances to the next step. [F4 (NAME)]: Assigns a name to the chain. For details see

the following section.

How to use the CHAIN 1. Press [CHAIN] to make the button indicator light The Drum Kit Chain function will be turned on.

2. Use the left/right [CURSOR] or [INC/DEC] to select kits in the order that you specified in the chain. You can use the up/down [CURSOR] to select chains.

* Press [CHAIN] to make the indicator go dark and the Drum Kit Chain function will be turned off.

Applications When this function is used together with the Pad Switch function or the Foot Switch function, you can use a pad or foot switch to select drum kits in a drum kit chain. To do this, set the MODE setting of the Pad Switch function or Foot Switch function to KIT SELECT. For details refer to Operations using pads and foot switches (p. 119).

Naming a Drum Kit Chain You can assign a name of up to 8 characters to each chain. fig.09-03

Procedure 1. Press [CHAIN]-[F1 (C EDIT)]-[F4 (NAME)]. The CHAIN NAME page will appear.

2. Use the left/right [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the character that you wish to change.

The blinking character is the one that can be changed.

3. Use either the VALUE dial, [INC/DEC], or [CURSOR] to change the character. Characters can be selected in the order shown in the bottom of the screen.

Function buttons In this page, the [F1][F4] buttons perform convenient func- tions for entering characters. [F1 (INSERT)]: All characters to the right of the cursor will

be moved to the right. [F2 (DELETE)]: The character at the cursor location will be

deleted, and all characters to the right of the cursor will be moved to the left.

[F3 (SPACE)]: A blank space will be inserted at the cursor location.

[F4 (CHAR)]: Cycle between uppercase/lowercase/sym- bols.

Chain 1 Kit 7

Kit 2

Kit 5

Kit 10

Chain 2

Chain 16

32 steps

Chapter 8. Convenient functions

116

Copying You can copy drum kits,instruments, mixer & effect settings etc. to the destination of your choice. However, doing so will erase (overwrite) the data that was in the new destination. So be careful before you perform this operation.

* Some display pages do not allow copy. In such cases, pressing [TOOLS] will not produce COPY above [F1] in the display.

Procedure (Example) Copying a kit Select the copy source.

1. Press [KIT]. The DRUM KIT page will appear.

2. Press [TOOLS]. The function names for [F1][F4] appear in the lower part of the display.

3. Press [F1 (COPY)]. The display (COPY DRUM KIT) shows the source and destination position. Use the [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the source and destination.

* [PRESET] refers to the drum kits that were stored in the unit at the factory. [USER] refers to drum kits that currently can be used. And, [CARD] refers to drum kits stored on memory card.

4. Press [F4 (COPY)]. A confirmation display will appear.

5. Then press [F4 (EXEC)] and the kit will then be copied (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page with- out excecuting out the operation.)

* If you press [F3 (EXCHNG)], the contents of the new destina- tion and copy source will be exchanged, a convenient way to rearrange or organize drum kits.

A display in which Copy can be used DRUM KIT page ([KIT])

INST page ([INST]) Instrument Copy will be done only to the same TRIG- GER INPUT jack of the other kit.

STUDIO page ([STUDIO])

CONTROL ROOM page ([CONTROL ROOM])

TRIGGER BANK page ([SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F1 (BANK)])

PERC GROUP page ([KIT]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F1 (PRCGRP)])

MIXER page ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)])

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER page ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F2 (COMP)])

Compressor settings can be copied to another kit for TRIGGER INPUT jacks 110 as a group.

EQ page ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F3 (EQ)]) Equalizer settings can be copied to another kit for TRIG- GER INPUT jacks 110 as a group.

EFFECT page ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (EFFECT)])

The UNDO function The UNDO function allows you to recall original parameters of any function you have edited, but ONLY from the pre- sent cursor position. If you change the cursor position, or page in the display, UNDO will not work.

Example: If when choosing an instrument, you scroll through many sounds not finding the one you want. UNDO can bring back the original setting. Only changes made with the [INC/DEC] buttons or the VALUE dial can be undone. And ONLY in Pages where pressing [TOOLS] calls up [F3(UNDO)] in the display.

Procedure (Example: Undoing an instrument selection)

1. Press [INST]. The INST page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select a different instrument.

If you want to bring back the original instrument just exe- cute UNDO.

3. Press [TOOLS]. The function names for [F1][F4] will appear in the lower part of the display.

4. Press [F3 (UNDO)]. The instrument that had been selected in step 1 will reap- pear.

* If while editing, you accidentally touch another pad or rim, you cannot undo the parameter you were working on. Also, Bulk Load, Kit Copy/Exchange cannot be undone.

Chapter 8. Convenient functions

117

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Getting help The TD-10 comes with a built in help page using key- words to select various functions, and a jump mode to take you to that setting page instantly.

Procedure 1. Press [TOOL]-[F4 (HELP)]. A list of help keywords (HELP INDEX) will appear.

2. Use [F1 (UP)] or [F2 (DOWN)] to select a keyword.

3. Press [F4 (SELECT)].

4. If you wish to jump to the setting page for the displayed function, press [F4 (GO NOW)]. To return to the keyword select page, press [F1 (INDEX)].

Specifying how the Preview button functions To audition and edit instruments, tap [PREVIEW]. Press [TRIG SELECT] in the INST page to select the trigger input number corresponding to the pad/sound you wish to listen to. The trigger number and instrument will appear in the upper right of the display. The [RIM] indicator will show whether the head or the rim is selected. Or call up a sound in the percussion group. You have various choices of how the [PREVIEW] button will respond.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F3 (CTRL)]-[F4 (OPTION)]. The PREVIEW SETTINGS page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Preview Button.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. ON: The volume will be fixed, regardless of the force of

your tap. OFF: The strength of your tap will affect the volume.

4. With a setting of OFF, you can specify the volume. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Velocity.

5. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the volume. With a setting of 1 will produce the minimum volume. A setting of 127 will produce the maximum volume.

Chapter 8. Convenient functions

118

By changing the function of controllers or the way in which they are used, you can perform a variety of convenient operations. This opens up some very interesting performance possibilities.

Using pads to play patterns (Pad Pattern) You can make settings so that striking a pad will playback a previously selected pattern. This func- tion provides a very convenient way to use patterns during a live performance.

* If different patterns have been assigned to two or more pads, striking another pad while a pattern is playing back will cause pattern playback to switch to the newly selected pattern. If you have switched to a pattern whose instrument settings are different, the sound may be interrupted for an instant.

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F4 (CTRL >)]-[F3 (PATTERN )]. The INST CTRL page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The setting page for the pad you struck will appear.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the pattern number. With a setting of OFF, the Pad Pattern function will be off.

* The symbol on the right side of the pattern name indicates how the pattern will be played back. For details on this setting, refer to p. 98.

4. The pattern will playback when you hit the pad.

* If you do not want to hear the instrument assigned to that pad, press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]- [F1 (VOLUME)] and set the volume to 0.

* Pad patterns cannot be used during sequencer recording.

Using pads to perform button operations (Pad Switch) fig.10-01

Procedure 1. Connect pads to TRIGGER INPUT jacks AUX 1 and AUX 2.

2. Press [SETUP]-[F3 (CTRL)]-[F2 (PAD SW)]. The PAD SWITCH page will appear.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the combination of functions for the AUX 1 and AUX 2 jacks (refer to the following).

4. Press [EXIT] to exit this page.

5. Strike the selected pads, and they will function as switches.

Parameters Mode (function name) Function of the pad connected to the AUX1 jack Function of the pad connected to the AUX2 jack OFF Pad switch is off Pad switch is off KIT SELECT Pad switch is off Select the next kit PATTERN SEL Pad switch is off Select the next pattern KIT SELECT (2) Select the previous kit Select the next kit PATTERN SEL (2) Select the previous Pattern Select the next pattern

Chapter 9. Operations using pads and foot switches

119

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

* If you do not want to trigger instrument sounds assigned to the pads, press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F1 (VOLUME)], and set the volumes of AUX 1 and AUX 2 to 0.

* If the Mode setting is KIT SELECT or PATTERN SEL, striking the rim of the pad will have the same function as pressing [DEC].

* If you wish to use Drum Kit Chain (p. 70) to select kits, set the above MODE parameter to KIT SELECT, and press [CHAIN] to make the button indicator light. (Create your Drum Kit Chain settings first.)

Using foot switches to perform button opera- tions (Foot Switch)

Two foot switches (BOSS FS-5U, optional) and a special cable (PCS-31) can be used to operate the TD-10. Set Mode to specify the function of the two pedals.

fig.10-03

Foot switch SW1 SW2 FS-5U x 2 (PCS-31) o (red) o (white) DP-2 - o

o: Function -: Not function

Procedure 1. Connect the foot switch to the FOOT SWITCH jack.

2. Press [SETUP]-[F3 (CTRL)]-[F1 (FOOTSW)]. The FOOT SWITCH page will appear.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the combination of functions that the foot switch will perform (refer to the following table).

4. Press [EXIT] to exit this page.

5. Press the foot switches, and they will function as switches.

Parameters Mode (function name) SW1 SW2 KIT SELECT Select the previous kit Select the next kit PATTERN SEL Select the previous pattern Select the next pattern PATTERN PLAY Select the next pattern Playback/stop the pattern

* To use foot switches to select kits using a Drum Kit Chain (p. 70), set the above MODE parameter to KIT SELECT, and press [CHAIN] to make the button indicator light. (Create your Drum Kit Chain set- tings first.)

Chapter 9. Operations using pads and pedals

120

There are many possibilities when using MIDI, such as:

1. Use an external sequencer to save/load drum kits, pattern data etc.

2. Use the pads to play external instruments As the TD-10 is a pad-to-MIDI interface, using external mod- ules, samplers etc. can expand your potential (p. 122).

3. When using an external sequencer, the TD- 10 is a powerful drum sound module espe- cially when accessing the Percussion group for an even wider variety of instruments (p. 126).

Saving/Loading data to/from an external device (Bulk Dump) Saving data To save data, use the external sequencer as you would when recording musical data, and perform the following steps on the TD-10 as shown in the following diagram. Use a MIDI cable to connect the TD-10s MIDI OUT jack to the MIDI IN jack of the external sequencer. fig.11-01e

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F4 (BULK)]. The BULK DUMP page will appear.

2. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the data that will be transmitted.

ALL: All data (drum kits, patterns, percus- sion groups, and setup) will be trans- mitted.

SETUP: Trigger and pad settings. will be trans- mitted.

ALL DRUM KITS: Drum kits 150 will be transmitted. ALL PERC GROUP: Data for percussion groups 14 will be

transmitted. ALL PATTERN: Data for patterns 51100 will be trans-

mitted.

3. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and data transmission will begin. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page with- out carrying out the operation.)

* Bulk dump is a type of system exclusive (SYSEX) data. Use an external MIDI sequencer and be sure that it can receive and record SYSEX data.

Loading saved data to the TD-10 As shown in the following diagram, use a MIDI cable to con- nect the TD-10s MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT con- nector of the external sequencer. fig.11-01ae

No special settings are required for the TD-10 to receive data from an external sequencer. Everything is done automatically.

* When doing so,the data that was previously in the TD-10s memory will be lost. Be sure you have a backup!

Sequencer

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

TD-10

Sequencer

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

TD-10

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

121

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Setting the Device ID Transmitting saved data to two or more TD-10 units

The setting described here is necessary only when you wish to transmit separate data to two or more TD-10 units at the same time. Do not change this setting in any other case. If you lose track of the Device ID setting that was used when saving data via a bulk dump,it will no longer be possible to reload the bulk data that was saved.

* With the factory settings, the device ID is set to 17.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The MIDI GLOBAL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to DEVICE ID.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Device ID: 132

Usage (Example) Suppose that when data was saved via bulk dump, the TD-10s Device ID was set to 17. When re-trans- mitting this data back to the TD-10, it wont receive if the Device ID is set to something other than 17. fig.11-02e

Using pads to play an external MIDI sound module Heres how to make settings.

* You can play the TD-10 sounds with external sounds (called layering)

As shown in the following diagram, use a MIDI cable to con- nect the TD-10s MIDI OUT to the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI sound source. fig.11-02ae

Selecting the note number trans- mitted by each pad

You can select the MIDI note number (key number) that each pad will transmit. Set this to the note number of the sound that you wish to play on the external sound module or sampler.

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F4 (CTRL)]-[F4 (MIDI)]. The INST CTRL page will appear.

2. Strike the pad that you wish to edit. The note that is assigned to the pad will be indicated on the keyboard in the screen. Also, the note number will appear in Note No.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Note No.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the note num- ber.

Parameters Note No.: 0 (C -)127 (G 8)

Device ID: 17

Device ID: 16

MIDI IN

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

Transmit data Device ID:17

System exclusive is not received

MIDISound module

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

TD-10

MIDI IN B

POWER VOLUME

PHONES

INSTRUMENTPART

LEVEL PAN

REVERB CHORUS

KEY SHIFT MIDI CH

SELECT

EFX ON/OFF

USER INST

VIB RATE

ATTACK

VIB DEPTH

CUTOFF

DECAY

VIB DELAY

RESONANCE

RELEASE

DELAY

PREVIEW (PUSH)

EFX VALUEEFX PARAMEFX TYPE

ALL

MUTE

SC-55 MAP

SC-88 MAP

PART INSTRUMENT

PARTDELAY

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

122

* For the hi-hat, make the setting only for the note number for the Open Hi-hat (default setting is 46 (A#2)). This setting will adjust the closed and pedal sounds as well.

(Example) If you decrease the Open Hi-hat note number by 2, the Close and Pedal settings will also decrease by 2.

Setting the Gate Time

For each pad, you can specify the length of time the note will hold during transmission from the MIDI OUT.

Drum sound modules normally produce sound only in response to note-on messages, and ignore note-off mes- sages. However general-purpose sound modules or sam- plers do receive the note-off messages that are transmitted and respond by turning off the sound. For example, if you are triggering a loop in a sampler, or other sounds then the gate time parameter is very important. With the factory defaults (preset values), the transmitted gate time is set to the minimum value.

Procedure 1. Press [INST]-[F4 (CTRL)]-[F4 (MIDI)]. The INST CTRL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Gate Time. 3.Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the duration of the notes.

Parameters Gate Time: 0.18.0 seconds

Setting the MIDI channel For setting the MIDI channel, refer to the section below, MIDI settings for the entire TD-10. Performance on the pads is transmitted from MIDI OUT on the same channel as the channel setting for the Drum part (All Drums in the setting page).

Using the TD-10 with the Roland SPD-11 This section explains how you can use the Roland SPD-11 (a MIDI controller) together with the TD-10s pads to play internal sounds and an external sound Module. Connect the SPD-11 and TD-10 as shown below. fig.11-11e

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The MIDI GLOBAL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Soft Thru.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to turn the setting ON. The messages (except for System Exclusive) received at MIDI IN will also be transmitted from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.

* If this setting is not used, leave it OFF as the trigger response of the pads will be faster.

Parameters Soft Thru: OFF, ON

MIDI IN MIDI

OUT/THRU

MIDI OUT

SPD-11Pad or pedal

TRIGGER INPUT

To the MIDI IN of another sound module or sampler

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

123

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

MIDI settings for the entire TD-10 Setting the MIDI channels for

each Part For each part, you can specify the channel on which the TD- 10 will receive and transmit MIDI messages.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]. The MIDI page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the part whose MIDI channel you wish to set.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the channel number.

With a setting of 1 through 16, MIDI messages will be transmitted and received on that channel. A setting of OFF lets you turn off reception for that part, so that notes are not received.

Parameters Channel: ch 1ch 16, OFF

Turning off Local Control This setting is required when you wish to record your pad performance on an external MIDI sequencer. fig.11-03e

So that the performance data from the pads is NOT sent directly to the sound generating section of the TD-10 (Local Control off), but is instead sent first to the external sequencer via the MIDI OUT, and then re-transmitted to the TD-10, please refer to the above diagram.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The MIDI GLOBAL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Local Control.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to turn the setting OFF.

* If you make connections and record as shown figure with a set- ting of Local On, duplicate notes will be re-transmitted to the TD-10 and will not be played correctly.

Parameters Local Control: OFF, ON

Disabling reception or trans- mission of Program Changes

You can specify whether or not the TD-10 will transmit and/or receive program change messages to/from an exter- nal device.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F3 (PROG)]. The MIDI Program Change page will appear.

2. Each time you press [F1], reception will be turned on/off. Each time you press [F2], transmission will be turned on/off.

Reducing the amount of data transmitted by the FD-7 (Pedal Data Thin)

This function allows you to prevent an excessive amount of data from being transmitted from the pedal to the internal sequencer or via the MIDI OUT.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The MIDI

GLOBAL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Pedal Data Thin.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting. With a setting of 1 or 2, pedal data will be thinned out. 2 will reduce the amount of data more drastically than 1. Normally you should use a setting of 1, and select 2 when you need greater data reduction. With a setting of Normal the data will not be thinned.

* Leave this at the normal setting if you are being extremely pre- cise with how you are using the FD-7 controller.

Parameters Pedal Data Thin: OFF, 1, 2

TD-10

Sound module Sequencer

Trigger input

Local off

MIDI OUT/THRU

MIDI IN

: Performance data flow route

TriggerMIDI converter

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

124

Using the TD-10 as a sound module As shown in the following diagram, use a MIDI cable to con- nect the TD-10s MIDI IN to the MIDI OUT connector of an external sequencer,keyboard or pad controller (such as SPD- 11). fig.11-01ae

The settings discussed here are necessary only when using the TD-10 as a MIDI sound module.

* When using the TD-10 as a 4-part sound module, the sounds you select must be assigned to a PATTERN as the pattern para- meters store which sounds you are using. In this case its best to use an empty pattern to make these settings. (Press [PAT- TERN]-[F4 (NEW)] to select an empty pattern containing no performance.)

Setting the instrument for each part

Refer to Chapter 6. Sequencer in the section Settings for part instruments (p. 106). If you wish to select instruments for the backing parts (Part 1, Part 2 , Bass part) from an external MIDI device, transmit program changes (PG) 154. These correspond to instru- ments 154 of the TD-10s backing parts.

Adjusting the mixer settings for each part

Refer to Chapter 6. Sequencer in the section Settings for part instruments (p. 106).

Regarding note numbers for the drum kit sounds

Refer to Selecting the note number transmitted by each pad (p. 122).

Example of settings for General MIDI score fig.11-04e

Sequencer

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

TD-10

H 2 R 2

H 1

C2

H 5 H 4

H 6

H 3 R 3

R 4

R 8

R 9

H 9

R10

H7

H7

R6

H7

H 8 H10

TRIGGER No. TRIGGER No.

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

125

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Using the percussion group The percussion group is used only when playing the TD-10 from an external MIDI controller, keyboard or sequencer. fig.11-05e

The sounds in the percussion groups have their own inde- pendent note number map in order to be played from an external MIDI controller, and can be changed if you want.

* If the same note number is assigned to both a pad and an instru- ment in the percussion group, the pad has priority and you will only hear the sound assigned to that pad.

* For details on note number assignments, refer to the table on p. 150.

Selecting a percussion group The TD-10 contains four percussion groups and you can assign one group per kit. When editing sounds in the per- cussion group, you can play them from an external MIDI controller or use the (PREVIEW) button. The position of the cursor will determine which sound is assigned to the PRE- VIEW button. fig.11-07

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F1 (PRCGRP)]. The PERC GROUP page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the GROUP num- ber.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the group.

Parameters Group: 14

Selecting percussion instruments Heres how to select the instrument for each note number of the percussion group. fig.11-08

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F1 (PRCGRP)]. The PERC GROUP page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] (left/right) to move the cursor to the instrument name.

3. Use [CURSOR] (up/down) to move the cursor to the note number whose instrument you wish to change.

* Instruments whose group name includes ELEC, TR-808 or TR-909 cannot be used.

* If an indication such as H1 is displayed at the instrument name, a drum kit instrument is selected. For these note num- bers, select an instrument in the INST page.

* When an external MIDI controller connected, playing a note on the keyboard will move the cursor to the note number that you played. Note Chase needs to be ON (p. 115).

C2

H7

H7 H7

H 8 R10

TRIGGER No. TRIGGER No.

: An instrument of the percussion group will sound.

H 2 R 2

H 1

H 5 H 4

H 6

H 3 R 3

R 4

R 8

R 9

H 9

R10

R6

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

126

Function buttons When the cursor is located at the instrument name, you can press [F1 (LIST)] to access the instrument list page. Press [F2 (EDIT)] to access the instrument edit page. For details on edit functions, refer to Percussion group editing.

Adjusting the volume balance between the drum kit and the per- cussion group

The volume (Group Volume) and effect send (Group Send Level) can be adjusted for all the drums and for the entire percussion group. fig.11-09

Procedure (Group Volume) 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F4 (GRPVOL)]. The GROUP VOLUME page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the group that you wish to set.

DRUMS adjusts the volume of the drum kit, and PERC adjusts the volume of the percussion group.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters DRUMS, PERC: 0127

Procedure (Group Send Level) 1. Press [CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]-[F2 (SNDRTN)]. The EFFECT GROUP page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the group that you wish to set.

Drums adjusts the effect send level of the whole drum kit, Perc adjusts the effect send level of the percussion group, and Part adjusts the send level of the backing part.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Send Level: 0127

Percussion group editing Each instrument in the percussion group can be edited. fig.11-10

Procedure 1. Press [KIT]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F1 (PRCGRP)]-[F2 (EDIT)]. The PERC INST EDIT page will appear.

2. Play the external MIDI controller connected to the MIDI IN to select the note number you wish to edit and the corre- sponding setting page will appear.

3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to set.

4. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to make the setting.

Parameters Note Move the cursor to the left to select the note number for edit- ing. Move the cursor to the right to select the instrument.

Volume: 0127 Adjusts the volume.

Pan: L15CENTERR15 Adjusts the left/right position.

Pitch: -4800+480 Adjusts the pitch of the sound.

Decay: -31031 Adjusts the decay time of the sound.

Ambience: 0127 Adjusts the ambience send level.

Fx Send: 0127 Adjusts the effect send level.

Output: Master, Phones Only You can select MASTER OUT PHONES jack only as out- put destinations for the percussion group.

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

127

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Changing the kit number that is selected by a program change

You can freely select the correspondence between program changes and drum kits, so that (for example) drum kit 10 could be selected when program change number 5 is received.

* This would only be used in special cases when using a lot of MIDI information from a sequencer, and using the same pro- gram change MIDI channel to change patches in other modules, effect units etc.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F3 (PROG)]. The MIDI Program Change page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor next to the kit name for which you wish to select a program change number.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the program change number.

MIDI messages for detailed performance expressions Messages for hi-hat control The TD-10s hi-hat controller also transmits the depth to which the pedal is pressed, using control change messages. By default (factory preset), control change 4 is used. Reception/transmission to/from an external MIDI sequencer will use this number.

* If the MIDI device that you are using already uses control change number 4 for another function then you can set the hi- hat to use a different control change number.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F2 (CTRL)]. The MIDI Control Change page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Pedal CC.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the control change number.

Parameters Pedal CC: OFF, Modulation (1), Foot Ctrl (4), General1 (16),

General2 (17) OFF:Hi-hat data control will not be received or transmitted

via MIDI IN or MIDI OUT. Modulation (1), Foot Ctrl (4), General1 (16), General2 (17):

The specified control change will be used for hi-hat control. This setting will be used both for reception at MIDI IN and for transmission from MIDI OUT.

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

128

Messages for positional sens- ing (snare drum and ride cym- bal only)

The TD-10 uses control change messages to indicate the position a snare pad or ride cymbal pad was hit. The loca- tion from the center of the pad outward to the rim is indicat- ed by control change 16 for the snare drum (TRIGGER INPUT jack 2), and by control change 17 for the ride cymbal (TRIGGER INPUT jack 10). These numbers are used for both transmission and reception to/from an external MIDI device.

* If a MIDI device that you are using already uses control change numbers 16 and 17, you can change these numbers.

Procedure 1. Press [SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)]-[F2 (CTRL)]. The MIDI Control Change page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to SNARE to make the snare setting, or RIDE to make the ride cymbal set- ting.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the control change number.

Parameters Zone CC:OFF, Modulation (1), General1 (16), General2 (17) OFF:Positional sensing data will not be received or transmit-

ted via MIDI IN and MIDI OUT. Modulation (1), General1 (16), General2 (17):

Positional sensing data will be handled using the speci- fied control change. This setting is applied to reception via MIDI IN and transmission from MIDI OUT.

Synchronization with external MIDI devices This section discusses the settings that allow an external MIDI sequencer and the TD-10s sequencer to be synchro- nized. The device that is playing back is called the master and the device that is synchronizing to the playback is called the slave.

About the SYNC parameters Internal: The TD-10s tempo setting will be used for

playback/recording. When shipped from the factory, this setting is selected.

External: The TD-10s sequencer will operate in accor- dance with tempo data (MIDI Clock) from the external device.

Auto: This is a convenient setting that combines features of both the Internal and External set- tings. If the TD-10s [PLAY] is pressed when no synchronization signal is being received, pressing the [PLAY] will playback according to the internal setting. When a synchroniza- tion signal is being received from an external device, the TD-10 will sync to that signal.

Remote: The TD-10 will obey start/pause/stop mes- sages from an external device, but will play- back according to its own tempo setting.

MIDI Delay: Tempo messages will be received to control the Beat Delay of the effect. Since Song Select and playback start/pause/stop mes- sages will not be received, use this setting when you do not want the internal sequencer to playback in synchronization.

Synchronizing the TD-10 to the playback of an external sequencer

In this case, the TD-10 will be the slave. As shown in the fol- lowing diagram, use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT of the external MIDI device to the TD-10s MIDI IN connec- tor. fig.11-01ae

Sequencer

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

TD-10

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

129

C h a p te

r 1

C h a p te

r 2

C h a p te

r 3

C h a p te

r 4

C h a p te

r 5

C h a p te

r 6

C h a p te

r 7

C h a p te

r 8

C h a p te

r 9

C h a p te

r 1 0

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The PATTERN GLOBAL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Sync Mode.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select External or Auto.

4. Begin playback on the transmitting device (master). Synchronized playback will begin.

Synchronizing an external sequencer to the TD-10

In this case, the TD-10 will be the master. As shown in the following diagram, use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT of the TD-10 to the MIDI IN connector of the external device. fig.11-01e

Procedure 1. Press [PATTERN]-[F2 (SETUP)]-[F1 (GLOBAL)]. The PATTERN GLOBAL page will appear.

2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Sync Mode.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to Internal or Auto.

4. Make settings on the external sequencer so that it will synchronize.

5. Press [PLAY] to start playback on the TD-10. Synchronized playback will begin.

Sequencer

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

TD-10

Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI

130

A p p en

d ic

es

Appendices

131

This section outlines points to check if you experience prob- lems, and what to do about them. For matters related to very basic settings, refer to the Quick Start, Troubleshooting connections and settings.

Problems with the overall sound Does not sound right. Is pad sensitivity adjusted correctly? First refer to the Quick Start Specify the pads that the

TD-10 will use (p. 29), and make sure that trigger set- tings are correct. If you wish to make additional adjust- ments to the sensitivity, refer to Adjusting the sensitivity of a pad (p. 39). If you are using drum triggers or pads made by another manufacturer, refer to the Advanced Use Basic settings for the trigger parameters (BASIC) (p. 109) and Detailed settings for the trigger parameters (ADVNCD) (p. 111).

No sound Is the volume setting off or too low? Press the buttons in the order given in the parentheses ( ) to access the appropriate setting page. Has the [VOLUME CONTROL] (MASTER) been low-

ered? Rotate the [VOLUME CONTROL] knob to be sure. Have the [GROUP FADERS] been lowered? Raise the [GROUP FADERS] sliders. Have the Control Room volumes for each instrument

been lowered? ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F1 (VOLUME)])

Hit the pad that is not sounding, so that the cursor moves to the slider for that pad. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

Have compressor Level settings for each instrument been lowered? ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F2 (COMP)])

Hit the pad that is not sounding, to access the setting page. Press [F4] to select Level, and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

Has the Control Room (GROUP VOLUME) setting for the overall kit been lowered? ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F4 (GRPVOL)])

Select DRUM in the setting page, and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

Are the pads connected correctly? Make sure that the pad connections are correct, and that each pad is connected to the proper input.

Has a non-volume parameter been set so that no sound can be output? Check the following points. If you are using brushes, have you selected a special

brush kit? ([KIT]) When selecting the drum kit, select one that has the fol-

lowing symbol in the lower right of the display. fig.12-01

Has the output assignment been changed? ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F3 (OUTPUT)])

Hit the pad that does not sound, so that the cursor moves to the setting for that pad. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to select the correct output.

Is the instrument number set to 600 (OFF)? Press [INST], and in the screen display which appears,

select an instrument numbered 1559.

No sound when you tap the [PREVIEW] Do you have Local Control (p. 124) set to "OFF"? Things should be connected/set so performance data that has been routed through the external sequencer (or other device) will be input to the TD-10, as illustrated on p. 124. Local Control should be set to ON if an external sequencer is not being used.

Changes in the settings are not reflected in the sound

Is the head/rim selection incorrect? Some parameters can be set independently for the head and the rim. In such cases, take note of the HEAD or RIM indication in the display screen.

Volume settings dont seem right Check the group faders If you wish to reproduce the volume balance that was set for the drum kit in the Control Room, set all of the front panel [GROUP FADERS] to the same position.

There is no sound when a pad is struck softly

If a pad was struck while the power was being turned on, the pad will respond poorly when struck softly. Turn off the power. Then turn on the power once again, and do not strike a pad until the drum kit is displayed. The minimum output level of the pad is detected when the power is turned on. If the pad is struck at this time, the out- put level of the pad will be detected incorrectly, causing the pad to have poor response.

Troubleshooting

132

Rotating [MASTER] does not change the volume

The [MASTER] knob adjusts the volume level from the MASTER jacks, and does not affect the volume of the output from the headphones or the DIRECT 1, 2, 3 outputs.

No Effects Check the following points by pressing the buttons in the order given in parentheses ( ) and youll access the appro- priate setting page. Has the master effect switch been turned off? ([KIT]-[F3

(FX SW)]) Press [F4] to turn it ON. Has the send level for each instrument been turned

down?(for digital effects) ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]-[F1 (FXSEND)])

Hit the pad for which no effect is sounding, and the cur- sor will move to the slider for that pad. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

Has the master level of the effect been turned down? (In the page accessed by [CONTROL ROOM]-[F4 (EFFECT)]- [F2 (SNDRTN)], select Output Level)

In the setting page, select Output Level and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

No Ambience Check the following points by pressing the buttons in the order given in parentheses ( ) and youll access the appropri- ate setting page. Has the master ambience switch been turned off? ([KIT]-

[F3 (FX SW)]) Press [F1] to turn it ON. Has the send level for each instrument been turned

down? ([STUDIO]-[F4 (AMBNCE)]-[F1 (AMBSND)]) Hit the pad for which no ambience is heard, and the cur-

sor will move to the slider for that pad. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

Has the ambience group send level been turned down? ([STUDIO]-[F4 (AMBNCE)]-[F2 (GRPSND)])

Select the group to which ambience does not apply (DRUMS, PERC, PART ), and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

Has the level of the ambience output destination been lowered? ([STUDIO]-[F4 (AMBNCE)]-[F3 (AMBLVL])

Select the output destination (MASTER, DIR1, DIR2, DIR3 ), and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

The volume level of the instrument connected to MIX IN jack is too low.

Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor? Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.

Equalizer doesnt work (individual or MASTER)

Check the following points by pressing the buttons in the order given in parentheses ( ) and youll access the appro- priate setting page.

Has the switch that turns the equalizer on/off for each kit been turned off? ([KIT]-[F3 (FX SW)])

Press [F3] to turn it ON. Has the master equalizer switch been turned off? ([KIT]-

[F4 (MAS EQ)]) Press [F1] to turn it ON. Has the equalizer switch for each pad been turned off?

([CONTROL ROOM]-[F3 (EQ)]) Hit the pad for which no equalizion is heard and the set-

ting page for that pad will appear. Press [F1] to turn the setting ON.

Compressor doesnt work Has the switch which turns the compressor on/off for

each kit been turned off? ([KIT]-[F3 (FX SW)]) Press [F2] to turn it ON. Has the compressor switch for each pad been turned off?

([CONTROL ROOM]-[F2 (COMP)]) Hit the pad for which no compression is heard so that the

setting page for that pad appears. Press [F1] to turn the setting ON.

Are the compressor settings correct? ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F2 (COMP)])

Refer to the explanations on p. 91 and correct the com- pressor settings.

Concerning pads and pedals Playing velocity doesnt correspond

to the resulting sound First refer to the Quick Start Specify the pads that the TD- 10 will use (p. 29) and make sure that the basic settings are correct. If this does not solve the problem or if you are using pads made by another manufacturer, refer to Adjusting the sensitivity of a pad (p. 39) and make detailed settings.

An instrument other than the one assigned is heard

When you hit a pad have the head/rim assignments been inverted? Also, simultaneously striking the head and rim (Rim Shot) will trigger the instrument assigned to the rim. If you wish to play the sound that is assigned to the head, be sure to strike only the head.

Have you changed the SCAN TIME setting (p. 111) after selecting the TRIGGER TYPE (p. 108)?

The head tension adjustment (p. 110) does not work correct- ly when the SCAN TIME setting is excessively low. This setting is automatically set to the most efficient values for each pad when you select the TRIGGER TYPE again.

Troubleshooting

133

A p p en

d ic

es

Hi-hat control pedal (FD-7) does not operate correctly

The hi-hat control pedal was not detected correctly at power-on. Turn off the power. Then turn on the power once again, and do not operate the hi-hat control pedal (FD-7) until the drum kit display appears. The position of the pedal when open is detected when the power is turned on. If the pedal was pressed while the power was being turned on, the pedal position will be detected incorrectly, and the pedal will not operate correctly.

MIDI-related problems No Sound when using an external

controller (sequencer,keyboard etc.) Has an internal volume setting been lowered? Check the following points. Pressing the buttons in the order given in parentheses ( ) will access the appropriate setting page. Has the individual volume for each instrument in the per-

cussion group been lowered? ([KIT]-[F2 (FUNC)]-[F1 (PRCGRP)]-[F2 (EDIT)])

Move the cursor to Note, and select the note which is not sounding. Next select Volume, and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to increase the value.

Has the Control Room volume for the entire percussion group been lowered? ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]- [F4 (GRPVOL)])

In the setting page select PERC, and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to raise the value.

Have output assignments been changed? ([CONTROL ROOM]-[F1 (MIXER)]-[F3 (OUTPUT]) (With the factory settings, the sound will be output only from the MASTER OUT and PHONES jacks.)

Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the correct output destination (MASTER, DIR1, DIR2, DIR3 ).

Has the MIDI channel of the part been turned off or changed? ([SETUP]-[F2 (MIDI)])

If the Channel column of the setting page indicates OFF, move the cursor to that value and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to specify the MIDI channel.

Bulk dump is not transmitted. Is the MIDI cable connected properly? If you wish to save a bulk dump on an external device, con- nect the TD-10s MIDI OUT/THRU connector to the external sequencers MIDI IN connector. Also, make sure that recep- tion of system exclusive messages is not turned off on the external sequencer. System exclusive data is data unique to individual devices, so verify all settings.

Sequencer-related problems Pressing [PLAY] does not start play-

back Are you playing back an empty pattern? Playback a pattern which contains musical data.

Is a part muted? In the page that appears when you press [PART]-[F4 (MUTE)], if MUTE is indicated for any parts, press [F1][F4] to switch these settings to PLAY.

Did playback occur for a moment and then stop immediately?

Is the playback type (PLAY TYPE) set to Tap? This type is used mainly when pads are used to playback a pattern step by step. In the page that appears when you press [PATTERN]-[F2 (FUNC)] [F3 (TYPE)], set Play Type to a setting other than Tap.

Click-related problems Click does not sound Is the [CLICK] indicator lit? If it is not lit, press [CLICK] to make it light. At this time, the click setting page appears,and you should hear the click sound. If not, then see below or press [EXIT] to exit the page.

Has the [GROUP FADERS] slider [CLICK] been lowered? Raise the [CLICK] slider.

Is the output destination of the click sound correct? In the page that appears when you press [CLICK]-[F2 (INST)], move the cursor to Output. If this is set to MAS- TER, the click will be output from MASTER OUT and the PHONES. If set to PHONES, the click will be output from the headphones ONLY.

Troubleshooting

134

Display-related problems Trigger indicators light on their own If a monitor speaker or the like is sounding at a high volume nearby a pad, the vibration can sometimes be detected by the pad as a trigger signal. If this occurs, either move the speaker, or change the angle of the pad. Also verify the mounting of the pads and that the stand is stable in order to eliminate excess vibrations.

Display is too light or too dark The visibility of the display will change depending on the viewing angle and on room lighting conditions. Re-adjust the setting in the page that is displayed when you press [SETUP]-[F3 (CTRL)]-[F3 (DISPLY)], or hold down [KIT] and rotate the VALUE dial to make the setting.(easiest way).

Other Hitting [PREVIEW] plays back a pat-

tern. Is a pad pattern assigned to the pad? In this case, using [PREVIEW] to play this pad will have the same result as striking the pad, and the pattern will play- back. To stop playback, press [STOP].

Sounds of other instruments are audible when using the DIRECT jacks

The ambience component of the tone being output from a DIRECT jack is being heard from the MASTER jack. Turn the ambience to "OFF" (p. 41), or set the "AMBIENCE Output Level" to "0" (p. 88). Regardless of the sound output assignments (Output Assign; p. 91), all of the ambience sounds are mixed into two chan- nels, (L) and (R), and sent to the outputs selected with the "AMBIENCE Output Level" setting (p. 88). Therefore, sounds may be audible through a different output than the output assigned for the instrument itself due to the "AMBI- ENCE Output Level" setting. For example, if the factory settings are changed so that the kick is output from the DIRECT jack, the ambience sounds are still to be output from the MASTER jack; as a result, the kick sound could be perceived as seeping from the MASTER jack.

Low-level crosstalk (-45 dB or lower) is per- ceived at another output connector. This is within the TD-10's specifications, so it should not be a source for concern.

Output Separation:76 dB (min.) (MASTER L -> DIRECT L, MASTER R -> DIRECT R): 45 dB (min.)

(DIRECT L -> Other DIRECT L, DIRECT R -> Other DIRECT R): 45 dB (min.)

Troubleshooting

135

A p p en

d ic

es

The instruments that can be assigned to each trigger are as follows. : The instrument can be assigned and V-EDIT is possible : The instrument can be assigned, but V-EDIT is not possible : Cannot be assigned

Trigger number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Inst group \ KICK SNARE TOM1 TOM2 TOM3 TOM4 HI-HAT CRASH1 CRASH2 RIDE AUX1 AUX2 V-KICK

V-SNARE

V-TOM

ELEC KICK

ELEC SNARE

ELEC TOM1

ELEC TOM2

ELEC TOM3

ELEC TOM4

808 KICK

808 SNARE

808 TOM1

808 TOM2

808 TOM3

808 TOM4

909 KICK

909 SNARE

909 TOM1

909 TOM2

909 TOM3

909 TOM4

Other

* On instruments with a group name that includes ELEC, 808, or 909, the combination of head and rim cannot be modified.

VERY IMPORTANT: If you assign two different V sounds from the same instrument group, to the head and rim, the choices made when editing (shell depth, head type etc.) will apply for both sounds. For the sound assigned to the rim, the ONLY individual edit parameter available is head tuning.

Parameters that can be set independently for the head and rim

[INST] parameters: Pitch, Decay (except for V-EDIT sounds)

[STUDIO] parameters: Amb Send Level (except for ELEC, 808 or 909 sounds)

[CONTROL ROOM] parameters: MIXER/Volume, MIXER/Fx Send (except for ELEC, 808 or 909 sounds)

[INST]-[F4 (CTRL)]-[F4 (MIDI)] parameters: TRIGGER to PATTERN, Gate Time, Note No.

[INST]-[F4 (CONTROL)]-[F3 (PATERN)] parameters: TRIGGER to PATTERN

Instruments that can be used with each trigger

136

If you wish to restore all internal settings to the factory pre- set values use the Initialize operation explained below. All internal settings will be lost when you perform the Initialize operation, so if necessary, save your data to a memory card or on an external MIDI device before initializing.

Procedure

1. Press [SETUP]-[F4 (UTIL)]-[F4 (INIT)]. The SYSTEM INITIALIZE page will appear.

2. Press [F4 (INIT)]. A confirmation display will appear.

3. Press [F4 (EXEC)] and the TD-10s data will be initialized. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page with- out executing the operation.)

How to recall original factory presets for individual drum kits, percussion groups and trigger banks. fig.12-01ae

(Example) Initializing individual Drum kits.

1. Press [KIT]. The DRUM KIT page appears.

2. Press [TOOLS]-[F1 (Copy)]. The COPY DRUM KIT page appears, showing the source and destination positions.

3. Use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to, scroll until you see PRESET in front of the drum kit you wish to recall.

4. Press [F4 (COPY)]. A confirmation display will appear.

5. Then press [F4 (EXEC)] and the data will be restored. (Press [F1 (CANCEL)] to return to the previous page with- out executing out the operation.)

source destination

Restoring the factory settings (INITIALIZE)

137

A p p en

d ic

es

This section lists the messages (error messages) that the TD- 10 produces and explains the meaning of each message, giv- ing you the appropriate action to take. If the TD-10 is not able to operate correctly or if an incorrect operation was per- formed, a message window will appear in the screen. Read this section and take the appropriate action. When an indication of ACCEPT is shown above [F4] as in the following figure, pressing that button will close the mes- sage window. fig.12-02

Backup Battery Low ! The internal backup battery of the TD-10 (a battery that maintains data in the user memory) has run down. Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center to have the battery replaced.

BACKUP NG ! The backup battery has run down completely, and the inter- nal data has been lost. Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center to have the battery replaced.

BULK DUMP Aborted by User ! Bulk data transmission was halted.

Check Sum Error ! The checksum value of a system exclusive message was incorrect.

BULK DUMP Data Transmit Completed ! Bulk data transmission was completed.

BULK DATA DEVICE ID Error ! Due to an incorrect Device ID, the system exclusive message could not be received. Set the correct Device ID (p. 122).

BULK DATA Load Error ! Reception of bulk dump failed. Make sure that all MIDI cables are firmly connected (p. 122).

BULK DATA Receiving ... Please, Wait. Bulk data is now being received. (Dont touch any buttons or pad during this process).

BULK DATA Receive Completed ! Bulk data reception has ended.

Empty Pattern You attempted to perform an editing operation on an empty pattern.

EXPANSION BOARD Not Ready or Unavailable ! Either the expansion board has been removed or was not installed correctly (p. 43).

ILLEGAL CARD This message may be due to one of the following two rea- sons: 1. Check whether the card has been used by a different

Roland device. Check whether the card has been used by a different Roland device. If you wish to erase the contents of the card and use it with the TD-10, press [F4 (ACCEPT)]. The card initialize page will appear. In this page, press [F4 (INIT)] and you will be asked whether it is OK to erase the contents of the card. To initialize the card, press [F4].To cancel, press [F1]. 2. Make sure that you are using an M-512E card ONLY.

MEMORY CARD Battery Low ! Please Change ! The backup battery of the memory card has run down. Refer to the owners manual for your memory card, and replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD Data Error ! There is a problem in the data of the memory card. If the power is turned off or the card removed while data is being written into the card (SAVE), the data in the card will be damaged. Format the card once again before using it (p. 114).

MEMORY CARD Data Load Completed ! Data has been loaded from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD Data Save Completed ! Data has been saved to the memory card.

MEMORY CARD Not Ready ! A pattern or drum kit chain attempted to access data from a memory card. Insert the memory card.

MEMORY CARD Write Protected. The memory card is write protected (switch in the write prohibit position), and data could not be saved. Move the write protect switch of the card to allow data to be saved (p. 114).

Message / error message list

138

MIDI Buffer Full ! A large amount of MIDI messages were received in a short time, and could not be processed completely. Make sure that a problem has not occurred with the MIDI cable connection or with your external MIDI device.

Data Overload Pattern contained an excessive amount of data, and as a result could not be output successfully from MIDI OUT. Try eliminating a track that has too much data.

MIDI Offline ! A MIDI cable was disconnected. (Or communication with the external MIDI device stopped for some reason.)

PATTERN DATA Not enough memory ! The internal memory for pattern storage is full. Save the pat- terns either to a memory card (p. 114) or to an external device via bulk dump, (p. 121) and then delete some or all of the internal patterns (p. 105).

SYSTEM ERROR A problem has occurred with the internal system. Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center.

SYSTEM INITIALIZE Completed ! Initialization of the TD-10s internal data has been complet- ed.

No Empty Pattern There are no more empty patterns. Clear unneeded patterns before using this function (p. 105).

Not Enough Memory Pattern recording or editing could not be carried out because there was not enough internal memory. Try again after deleting patterns that are no longer needed.

Message / error message list

139

A p p en

d ic

es

MIDI means Musical Instrument Digital Interface. By using MIDI you can play and/or control multiple instru- ments from a single MIDI controller, keyboard or sequencer, and is a world-wide standard, allowing communication between MIDI equipped instruments, no matter who manu- factured them. If you wish to use a MIDI keyboard to record on the TD-10, or to use an external sequencer to play the TD-10, we sug- gest that you understand the explanations that follow.

MIDI connectors fig.12-03a

MIDI IN This connector receives messages from external MIDI devices ( keyboards, sequencers controllers etc.) to play the TD-10s instruments or change its settings.

MIDI OUT The TD-10 transmits musical data from its sequencer or pads via the MIDI OUT, and can also use this connector save internal song data and settings to an external sequencer for back-up purposes.

MIDI THRU All messages received at MIDI IN are re-transmitted from this connector. (if Soft Thru is ON) refer to Chapter 10. Functions using MIDI, and read the section Using the TD- 10 with the Roland SPD-11 (p. 123). This connector is used when you wish to transmit the same stream of MIDI data to other devices. With the factory settings, this connector will function as MIDI OUT only.

MIDI channels and multi- timbral sound sources MIDI transmits many types of data over a single MIDI cable. This is made possible by the concept of MIDI channels which allow a device to distinguish the data that is or is not intended for it. In some ways, MIDI channels are similar to television channels. By changing the channel on a television set, you can view the programs that are being broadcast by different stations. In the same way, MIDI also allows a device to select the information intended for that device out of the variety of information that is being transmitted to it. fig.12-03be

MIDI uses sixteen channels; 1 through 16. Set the receiving device so that it will receive only the channel that it needs to receive. In the example below, the transmitting device is transmitting on channels 1 and 2, but sound module A has been set to receive only channel 1, and sound module B has been set to receive only channel 2. In this way, sound mod- ule A plays the guitar part and sound module B plays the bass part. fig.12-03ce

When the TD-10 is used as a sound module, it can function on four different channels simultaneously. This means that a single TD-10 can play a four-part ensemble. Sound modules like the TD-10 which can receive multiple MIDI channels at once to play different sounds on each channel are called multi-timbral sound modules.

THRU OUT IN MIDI

The cable from the antenna carries the TV signals from many broadcast stations.

The TV is set to the channel of the station you wish to watch.

Station A

Station B

Station C

Transmit channel : 1, 2 Receive channel : 1

Sound Module A

MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI THRU

MIDI IN Receive channel : 2

Sound Module B

MIDI keyboard

About MIDI

140

How the sequencer operates A sequencer is an electronic musical device that records and plays back performance data, meaning the note you play, how long it is held (gate time) and velocity with which you play, and various controller functions. The TD-10 contains a built-in sequencer with 50 preset patterns containing pre- programmed musical data. You can also create your own patterns. fig.12-04e

During playback, data recorded in the sequencer is transmit- ted to the sound module and played. As shown in the dia- gram above, each track is transmitted to the respective part; track 1 plays part 1 and track 2 plays part 2, and so forth. During recording, the performance information from the pads or MIDI keyboard is transmitted to the sequencer, and the data is then transmitted to the sound module for play- back. A percussion group allows 60 types of instrument to be played via MIDI in addition to all the instruments of the drum kit. You can use instruments of the percussion group when using an external MIDI controller or keyboard to record on to the drum track.

MIDI keyboard

Pad

Part 1

Part 2

Bass part

Drum part

Pattern 1 - 100

Internal sound generator

External sound generator

TD-10

About MIDI

141

A p p en

d ic

es

This section explains how to attach an acoustic drum trigger.

Procedure 1. Attach the drum trigger to the acoustic drum. fig.12-05a

fig.12-05be

fig.12-05e

Drum Where to Install Kick On the playing head (5 to 10 cm from the rim) Snare drum On the playing head (2 to 3 cm from the rim) Tom tom On the shell (next to a lug located about 1 cm

from the playing head rim) Floor tom On the shell (next to a lug located about 1 cm

from the playing head rim)

* If the drum trigger of a tom has a low output level, attach it to the head.

2. Use a monaural cable to connect the drum trigger to the TD-10s TRIGGER INPUT jack.

Drum TRIGGER INPUT jack Kick 1 Snare drum 2 Tom tom 36

3. Make trigger settings on the TD-10. Press [SETUP]-[F1 (TRIG)]-[F1 (BANK)] to access the setting page. Next, use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the trigger number that you wish to set, and use [INC/DEC] or the VALUE dial to set the trigger parameters as shown in the following display. fig.12-07

4. When you hit the drum, the TD-10 wil l wil l be triggered.inverted? If it does not sound correctly, try changing the position of the drum trigger, or refer to The order in which trigger parameters should be set when using drum triggers (p. 112) and make adjustments.

* So that the drum trigger does not pick up extraneous vibrations, do not allow its cable to contact the rim or shell (body).

* Be sure to mute the bass drum and snare drum. If you use a ring mute, cut away part of the ring mute, so the drum trigger con- tacts the head directly.

* For details on adjusting the correspondence between playing velocity and the TD-10s volume, refer to p. 37 of the Quick Start, and Basic settings for the trigger parameters (p. 109).

Tom tomSnare drum

Kick Floor tom

Make sure that the wire does not touch

Using drum triggers

142

Drum kit list

*1 indicates a kit to be played with brushes.

*2 indicates a kit using sounds referred to # on page 144147. When these sounds are used a bit more time is needed when changing kits.

No. Kit name Percussion group Remark No. Kit name Percussion group Remark

1 StudioV 1

2 BigRock 1

3 Tight 1

4 JazzSizl 1

5 SuperBwl 1

6 Freak'n 1

7 OldScool 1 *1 8 TexMex 1 *2 9 GroovIn 1

10 BtDelayy 1

11 LatinSet 1

12 Orch Set 1

13 BrasRing 1

14 TR-808 1 *2 15 TR-909 1 *2 16 Dr Spin 1

17 Memphis 1

18 Cartoon 3

19 KornBall 1 *2 20 X-Stick 1

21 BIG Band 1

22 lowFI 1

23 CarTUNE 1

24 Natural 1

25 Dirty 1

26 Far East 1

27 SnareBuz 1

28 HEAVy 1

29 NextDoor 1

30 Latin 3D 1

31 Vintage 1

32 MIDIbrsh 1

33 SockHop 1

34 Woody 1

35 GoFigure 1

36 70'sRock 1

37 Brushes 1 *1 38 Electro 1 *2 39 Rock 1

40 Analog 1 *2 41 Fusion 1

42 Jazz 1

43 SLAPBACK 1

44 COMpress 1

45 LivnRoom 1

46 KitCopy1 1

47 KitCopy2 1

48 KitCopy3 1

49 KitCopy4 1

50 KitCopy5 1

Preset list

143

A p p en

d ic

es

Drum instrument list

No. Inst name Inst group Remark No. Inst name Inst group Remark

1 VintageK V-KICK

2 26"DeepK V-KICK

3 ThickHdK V-KICK

4 Round K V-KICK

5 Medium K V-KICK

6 BigRoomK V-KICK

7 Big K V-KICK

8 BigLow K V-KICK

9 Studio1K V-KICK

10 Studio2K V-KICK

11 Studio3K V-KICK

12 Studio4K V-KICK

13 Studio5K V-KICK

14 Studio6K V-KICK

15 Studio7K V-KICK

16 Studio8K V-KICK

17 Room 1 K V-KICK

18 Room 2 K V-KICK

19 Room 3 K V-KICK

20 Room 4 K V-KICK

21 Room 5 K V-KICK

22 Room 6 K V-KICK

23 Solid1 K V-KICK

24 Solid2 K V-KICK

25 Jazz 1 K V-KICK

26 Jazz 2 K V-KICK

27 18"JazzK V-KICK

28 BrshHitK V-KICK

29 Wood 1 K V-KICK

30 Wood 2 K V-KICK

31 Wood 3 K V-KICK

32 Maple1 K V-KICK

33 Maple2 K V-KICK

34 Oak K V-KICK

35 Birch K V-KICK

36 RoseWodK V-KICK

37 OnePly K V-KICK

38 WdBeatrK V-KICK

39 TakaokaK V-KICK

40 Oyster K V-KICK

41 Open K V-KICK

42 26"HardK V-KICK

43 Dry K V-KICK

44 DryMed K V-KICK

45 DryHardK V-KICK

46 DeepDryK V-KICK

47 Fusion K V-KICK

48 Meat K V-KICK

49 SandBagK V-KICK

50 BsktBalK V-KICK

51 MondVrbK V-KICK

52 Sizzle K V-KICK

53 NailHitK V-KICK

54 Box K V-KICK

55 Dance K V-KICK

56 House K V-KICK

57 Pillow K V-KICK

58 Rap K V-KICK

59 Hard808K V-KICK

60 Boom808K V-KICK

61 Noiz808K V-KICK

62 Real909K V-KICK

63 Wood909K V-KICK

64 909HdAtK V-KICK

65 ElephntK V-KICK

66 Cattle K V-KICK

67 Giant K V-KICK

68 Door K V-KICK

69 Punch K V-KICK

70 MachineK V-KICK

71 Broken K V-KICK

72 BendUp K V-KICK

73 HrdNoizK V-KICK

74 Trip K V-KICK

75 Splat K V-KICK

76 Scrach1K V-KICK

77 Scrach2K V-KICK

78 Hi-Q K V-KICK

79 Space K V-KICK

80 SynBassK V-KICK

81 Elec K ELEC KICK #

82 TR808 K TR808 KICK #

83 TR909 K TR909 KICK #

84 Picolo1S V-SNARE *2 85 Pco1RimS V-SNARE

86 Picolo2S V-SNARE *2 87 Pco2RimS V-SNARE

88 Picolo3S V-SNARE *2 89 Pco3RimS V-SNARE

90 Medium1S V-SNARE *2 91 Med1RimS V-SNARE

92 Medium2S V-SNARE *2 93 Med2RimS V-SNARE

94 Medium3S V-SNARE *2 95 Med3RimS V-SNARE

96 Medium4S V-SNARE *2 97 Med4RimS V-SNARE

98 Fat1 S V-SNARE *2 99 Fat1RimS V-SNARE

100 Fat2 S V-SNARE *2

Preset list

144

No. Inst name Inst group Remark No. Inst name Inst group Remark

101 Fat2RimS V-SNARE

102 AcusticS V-SNARE *2 103 AcusRimS V-SNARE

104 VintageS V-SNARE *2 105 VntgRimS V-SNARE

106 Maple1 S V-SNARE *2 107 Mpl1RimS V-SNARE

108 Jazz S V-SNARE *2 109 JazzRimS V-SNARE

110 Elec S ELEC SNARE #

111 TR808 S TR808 SNARE #

112 TR909 S TR909 SNARE #

113 Brush1 S SNARE *1 114 Brush2 S SNARE *1 115 BrshTmbS SNARE *1 116 MIDIBr1S SNARE

117 MIDIBr2S SNARE

118 Ballad S SNARE

119 Ring S SNARE

120 RingRimS SNARE

121 13" S SNARE

122 13" RimS SNARE

123 Rock S SNARE

124 RockRimS SNARE

125 TD7MpleS SNARE

126 TDMplRmS SNARE

127 R8MapleS SNARE

128 R8MplRmS SNARE

129 Funk S SNARE

130 FunkRimS SNARE

131 Bop S SNARE

132 Bop RimS SNARE

133 Bronze S SNARE

134 BrnzRimS SNARE

135 Picolo4S SNARE

136 Pco4RimS SNARE

137 Picolo5S SNARE

138 Pco5RimS SNARE

139 Picolo6S SNARE

140 Pco6RimS SNARE

141 Medium5S SNARE

142 Med5RimS SNARE

143 Medium6S SNARE

144 Med6RimS SNARE

145 Medium7S SNARE

146 Med7RimS SNARE

147 Medium8S SNARE

148 Med8RimS SNARE

149 Fat3 S SNARE

150 Fat3RimS SNARE

151 Fat4 S SNARE

152 Fat4RimS SNARE

153 Fat5 S SNARE

154 Fat5RimS SNARE

155 DynamicS SNARE

156 DynmcRmS SNARE

157 Roll S SNARE

158 Buzz S SNARE

159 NoSnareS SNARE

160 Dopin1 S SNARE

161 Dopin2 S SNARE

162 Reggae S SNARE

163 HrdNoizS SNARE

164 Cruddy S SNARE

165 Dance1 S SNARE

166 Dance2 S SNARE

167 Anvil S SNARE

168 House S SNARE

169 HousDpnS SNARE

170 HipHop S SNARE

171 Real808S SNARE

172 Real909S SNARE

173 Chu-Hi S SNARE

174 Clap! S SNARE

175 R70Pwr S SNARE

176 Whack S SNARE

177 CrsStk 1 SNARE

178 CrsStk 2 SNARE

179 CrsStk 3 SNARE

180 CrsStk 4 SNARE

181 CrsStk 5 SNARE

182 CrsStk 6 SNARE

183 808Crstk SNARE

184 Fibre T1 V-TOM

185 Fibre T2 V-TOM

186 Fibre T3 V-TOM

187 Fibre T4 V-TOM

188 Dry T1 V-TOM

189 Dry T2 V-TOM

190 Dry T3 V-TOM

191 Dry T4 V-TOM

192 NaturlT1 V-TOM

193 NaturlT2 V-TOM

194 NaturlT3 V-TOM

195 NaturlT4 V-TOM

196 StudioT1 V-TOM

197 StudioT2 V-TOM

198 StudioT3 V-TOM

199 StudioT4 V-TOM

200 Maple T1 V-TOM

201 Maple T2 V-TOM

202 Maple T3 V-TOM

203 Maple T4 V-TOM

204 Jazz T1 V-TOM

Preset list

145

A p p en

d ic

es

No. Inst name Inst group Remark No. Inst name Inst group Remark

205 Jazz T2 V-TOM

206 Jazz T3 V-TOM

207 Jazz T4 V-TOM

208 Buzz T1 V-TOM

209 Buzz T2 V-TOM

210 Buzz T3 V-TOM

211 Buzz T4 V-TOM

212 Slap T1 V-TOM

213 Slap T2 V-TOM

214 Slap T3 V-TOM

215 Slap T4 V-TOM

216 Rock T1 V-TOM

217 Rock T2 V-TOM

218 Rock T3 V-TOM

219 Rock T4 V-TOM

220 Room T1 V-TOM

221 Room T2 V-TOM

222 Room T3 V-TOM

223 Room T4 V-TOM

224 Big T1 V-TOM

225 Big T2 V-TOM

226 Big T3 V-TOM

227 Big T4 V-TOM

228 Punch T1 V-TOM

229 Punch T2 V-TOM

230 Punch T3 V-TOM

231 Punch T4 V-TOM

232 Brsh1 T1 V-TOM

233 Brsh1 T2 V-TOM

234 Brsh1 T3 V-TOM

235 Brsh1 T4 V-TOM

236 Brsh2 T1 V-TOM

237 Brsh2 T2 V-TOM

238 Brsh2 T3 V-TOM

239 Brsh2 T4 V-TOM

240 Oak T1 V-TOM

241 Oak T2 V-TOM

242 Oak T3 V-TOM

243 Oak T4 V-TOM

244 VintgeT1 V-TOM

245 VintgeT2 V-TOM

246 VintgeT3 V-TOM

247 VintgeT4 V-TOM

248 Dark T1 V-TOM

249 Dark T2 V-TOM

250 Dark T3 V-TOM

251 Dark T4 V-TOM

252 FusionT1 V-TOM

253 FusionT2 V-TOM

254 FusionT3 V-TOM

255 FusionT4 V-TOM

256 AttackT1 V-TOM

257 AttackT2 V-TOM

258 AttackT3 V-TOM

259 AttackT4 V-TOM

260 Hall T1 V-TOM

261 Hall T2 V-TOM

262 Hall T3 V-TOM

263 Hall T4 V-TOM

264 Birch T1 V-TOM

265 Birch T2 V-TOM

266 Birch T3 V-TOM

267 Birch T4 V-TOM

268 Beech T1 V-TOM

269 Beech T2 V-TOM

270 Beech T3 V-TOM

271 Beech T4 V-TOM

272 Micro T1 V-TOM

273 Micro T2 V-TOM

274 Micro T3 V-TOM

275 Micro T4 V-TOM

276 Hand T1 V-TOM

277 Hand T2 V-TOM

278 Hand T3 V-TOM

279 Hand T4 V-TOM

280 Bend T1 V-TOM

281 Bend T2 V-TOM

282 Bend T3 V-TOM

283 Bend T4 V-TOM

284 Bowl T1 V-TOM

285 Bowl T2 V-TOM

286 Bowl T3 V-TOM

287 Bowl T4 V-TOM

288 Dirty T1 V-TOM

289 Dirty T2 V-TOM

290 Dirty T3 V-TOM

291 Dirty T4 V-TOM

292 Space T1 V-TOM

293 Space T2 V-TOM

294 Space T3 V-TOM

295 Space T4 V-TOM

296 AnalogT1 V-TOM

297 AnalogT2 V-TOM

298 AnalogT3 V-TOM

299 AnalogT4 V-TOM

300 Noise T1 V-TOM

301 Noise T2 V-TOM

302 Noise T3 V-TOM

303 Noise T4 V-TOM

304 Elec T1 ELEC TOM1 #

305 Elec T2 ELEC TOM2 #

306 Elec T3 ELEC TOM3 #

307 Elec T4 ELEC TOM4 #

308 TR808 T1 TR808 TOM1 #

Preset list

146

No. Inst name Inst group Remark No. Inst name Inst group Remark

309 TR808 T2 TR808 TOM2 #

310 TR808 T3 TR808 TOM3 #

311 TR808 T4 TR808 TOM4 #

312 TR909 T1 TR909 TOM1 #

313 TR909 T2 TR909 TOM2 #

314 TR909 T3 TR909 TOM3 #

315 TR909 T4 TR909 TOM4 #

316 Pure HH HI-HAT

317 BrightHH HI-HAT

318 Jazz HH HI-HAT

319 Thin HH HI-HAT

320 Pop HH HI-HAT

321 Heavy HH HI-HAT

322 Dark HH HI-HAT

323 Light HH HI-HAT

324 12" HH HI-HAT

325 13" HH HI-HAT

326 14" HH HI-HAT

327 15" HH HI-HAT

328 HandC HH HI-HAT

329 Brush1HH HI-HAT

330 Brush2HH HI-HAT

331 SizzleHH HI-HAT

332 TambrnHH HI-HAT

333 MaracsHH HI-HAT

334 TR808 HH HI-HAT

335 TR909 HH HI-HAT

336 CR78 HH HI-HAT

337 Mtl808HH HI-HAT

338 Mtl909HH HI-HAT

339 Mtl78 HH HI-HAT

340 Med16 Cr CRASH

341 Med18 Cr CRASH

342 Quik16Cr CRASH

343 Quik18Cr CRASH

344 Dark16Cr CRASH

345 Dark18Cr CRASH

346 Rock16Cr CRASH

347 Rock18Cr CRASH

348 Brsh1 Cr CRASH

349 Brsh2 Cr CRASH

350 SzlBr Cr CRASH

351 Swell Cr CRASH

352 Splsh 8" CRASH

353 Splsh10" CRASH

354 Splsh12" CRASH

355 HdSpl 8" CRASH

356 HdSpl10" CRASH

357 DkSpl10" CRASH

358 China10" CRASH

359 China12" CRASH

360 China18" CRASH

361 China20" CRASH

362 SzlChina CRASH

363 SwlChina CRASH

364 PgyzBack CRASH

365 PgyCrsh1 CRASH

366 PgyCrsh2 CRASH

367 PgyCrsh3 CRASH

368 PgyCrsh4 CRASH

369 PgyCrsh5 CRASH

370 PgyCrsh6 CRASH

371 PgSplsh1 CRASH

372 PgSplsh2 CRASH

373 PhaseCym CRASH

374 Jazz Rd RIDE *2 375 Jazz RdB RIDE

376 Jazz RdX RIDE *2 377 Pop Rd RIDE *2 378 Pop RdB RIDE

379 Pop RdX RIDE *2 380 Rock Rd RIDE *2 381 Rock RdB RIDE

382 Rock RdX RIDE *2 383 Lite Rd RIDE *2 384 Lite RdB RIDE

385 Lite RdX RIDE *2 386 Quick Rd RIDE

387 Brsh1 Rd RIDE

388 Brsh2 Rd RIDE

389 SzlBr Rd RIDE

390 Szl1 Rd RIDE *2 391 Szl1 RdB RIDE

392 Szl1 RdX RIDE *2 393 Szl2 Rd RIDE *2 394 Szl2 RdB RIDE

395 Szl2 RdX RIDE *2 396 Szl3 Rd RIDE *2 397 Szl3 RdB RIDE

398 Szl3 RdX RIDE *2 399 Szl4 Rd RIDE

400 Pgy Rd1 RIDE *2 401 Pgy Rd1B RIDE

402 Pgy Rd1X RIDE *2 403 Pgy Rd2 RIDE *2 404 Pgy Rd2B RIDE

405 Pgy Rd2X RIDE *2 406 Cowbell1 PERCUSSION

407 Cowbell2 PERCUSSION

408 CowblDuo PERCUSSION

409 Tambrn 1 PERCUSSION

410 Tambrn 2 PERCUSSION

411 Tambrn 3 PERCUSSION

412 CongaHMt PERCUSSION

Preset list

147

A p p en

d ic

es

No. Inst name Inst group Remark No. Inst name Inst group Remark

413 CongaHOp PERCUSSION

414 CongaHSl PERCUSSION

415 CongaMMt PERCUSSION

416 CongaMOp PERCUSSION

417 CongaMSl PERCUSSION

418 CongaLMt PERCUSSION

419 CongaLOp PERCUSSION

420 CongaLSl PERCUSSION

421 BongoHMt PERCUSSION

422 BongoHOp PERCUSSION

423 BongoHSl PERCUSSION

424 BongoLMt PERCUSSION

425 BongoLOp PERCUSSION

426 BongoLSl PERCUSSION

427 Timbal1H PERCUSSION

428 Timbal1L PERCUSSION

429 Timbal2H PERCUSSION

430 Timbal2L PERCUSSION

431 VibraSlp PERCUSSION

432 Maracas PERCUSSION

433 Shaker PERCUSSION

434 Claves PERCUSSION

435 CabasUp PERCUSSION

436 CabasDwn PERCUSSION

437 PandroMt PERCUSSION

438 PandroOp PERCUSSION

439 PandroSl PERCUSSION

440 SurdoHMt PERCUSSION

441 SurdoHOp PERCUSSION

442 SurdoLMt PERCUSSION

443 SurdoLOp PERCUSSION

444 WhislLng PERCUSSION

445 WhislSht PERCUSSION

446 Agogo H PERCUSSION

447 Agogo L PERCUSSION

448 GiroLng1 PERCUSSION

449 GuiroSht PERCUSSION

450 GiroLng2 PERCUSSION

451 CuicaMt1 PERCUSSION

452 CuicaOpn PERCUSSION

453 CuicaLow PERCUSSION

454 CuicaMt2 PERCUSSION

455 ConcrtBD PERCUSSION

456 Timpani PERCUSSION

457 TmpHndMt PERCUSSION

458 MuteTimp PERCUSSION

459 Hand Cym PERCUSSION

460 Castanet PERCUSSION

461 TringlOp PERCUSSION

462 TringlMt PERCUSSION

463 WdBlockH PERCUSSION

464 WdBlockL PERCUSSION

465 Sleibell PERCUSSION

466 TablaNa PERCUSSION

467 TablaTin PERCUSSION

468 TablaTun PERCUSSION

469 TablaTe PERCUSSION

470 TablaTi PERCUSSION

471 BayaGe PERCUSSION

472 BayaKa PERCUSSION

473 BayaGin PERCUSSION

474 BayaSl PERCUSSION

475 TlkinDrm PERCUSSION

476 BellTree PERCUSSION

477 BendGong PERCUSSION

478 TinyGong PERCUSSION

479 Gong PERCUSSION

480 TemplBel PERCUSSION

481 Taiko PERCUSSION

482 Caxixi PERCUSSION

483 Kalimba PERCUSSION

484 SteelDrm PERCUSSION

485 Glcknspl PERCUSSION

486 Vibraphn PERCUSSION

487 Marimba PERCUSSION

488 Xylophon PERCUSSION

489 Tublrbel PERCUSSION

490 Celesta PERCUSSION

491 808Clap PERCUSSION

492 808Cwbl1 PERCUSSION

493 808Cwbl2 PERCUSSION

494 808Marcs PERCUSSION

495 808Clavs PERCUSSION

496 808CongH PERCUSSION

497 808CongM PERCUSSION

498 808CongL PERCUSSION

499 78 Cowbl PERCUSSION

500 78 Guiro PERCUSSION

501 78 Marcs PERCUSSION

502 78 MBeat PERCUSSION

503 78 Tmbrn PERCUSSION

504 AirDrive OTHER

505 Burt OTHER

506 Biwa OTHER

507 Boing1 OTHER

508 RvsBoin1 OTHER

509 Boing2 OTHER

510 RvsBoin2 OTHER

511 Bounce OTHER

512 CarDoor OTHER

513 CarHorn OTHER

514 Glass OTHER

515 Hammer OTHER

516 Hi-Q OTHER

Preset list

148

*1 Can be played using a sweep or swish technique (p. 79).

*2 Responds to positional sensing (p. 36).

* An X at the end of an instrument name means that it is a cross-faded type of sound. With velocity, you can control two sounds.

* When selecting instruments indicated by the following mark #, a bit more time is needed before you will hear the sound, especially if you are playing constantly while choosing them.

IMPORTANT: Please remember that there are limitations regarding instruments and their trigger assignments. Please see page 136.

No. Inst name Inst group Remark No. Inst name Inst group Remark

517 MtlNoise OTHER

518 MtlPhase OTHER

519 Orch Hit OTHER

520 OnKey OTHER

521 Punch OTHER

522 TapeStop OTHER

523 RvsTStop OTHER

524 TechTamb OTHER

525 TechNoiz OTHER

526 AfStmp OTHER

527 Barrel OTHER

528 ChinaDuo OTHER

529 Ou! OTHER

530 Ou! Up OTHER

531 Nope! OTHER

532 Snaps OTHER

533 Scrach 1 OTHER

534 Scrach 2 OTHER

535 Scrach 3 OTHER

536 Scrach 4 OTHER

537 Scrach 5 OTHER

538 Gt Slide OTHER

539 RvsGtSld OTHER

540 GtScrach OTHER

541 RvsGtScr OTHER

542 BsSlide OTHER

543 RvsBSlid OTHER

544 WahGtDw1 OTHER

545 WahGtUp1 OTHER

546 WahGtDw2 OTHER

547 WahGtUp2 OTHER

548 CutGtDwn OTHER

549 CutGtUp OTHER

550 Chord 1 OTHER

551 Chord 2 OTHER

552 Chord 3 OTHER

553 BrsFall1 OTHER

554 BrsFall2 OTHER

555 BrsFall3 OTHER

556 BrsFall4 OTHER

557 TB Bass OTHER

558 SlapBass OTHER

559 SawWave OTHER

560 Click OTHER

561 Bucket OTHER

562 TrashCan OTHER

563 Hoo! OTHER

564 ElecBird OTHER

565 Gun Shot OTHER

566 Mystery OTHER

567 Monster OTHER

568 KnockDwn OTHER

569 TimeTrip OTHER

570 RvsKick1 OTHER

571 RvsKick2 OTHER

572 RvsSnr 1 OTHER

573 RvsSnr 2 OTHER

574 RvsAnvil OTHER

575 RvsTom OTHER

576 RvsCrash OTHER

577 RvsChina OTHER

578 RvsBelTr OTHER

579 Rvs Hi-Q OTHER

580 RvsMFaze OTHER

581 RvsAirDr OTHER

582 Count 1 OTHER

583 Count 2 OTHER

584 Count 3 OTHER

585 Count 4 OTHER

586 Count 5 OTHER

587 Count 6 OTHER

588 Count 7 OTHER

589 Count 8 OTHER

590 Count 9 OTHER

591 Count 10 OTHER

592 Count 11 OTHER

593 Count 12 OTHER

594 Count 13 OTHER

595 CountAnd OTHER

596 Count E OTHER

597 Count A OTHER

598 Count Ti OTHER

599 Count Ta OTHER

600 OFF OTHER

Preset list

149

A p p en

d ic

es

Note number (factory settings) * For details refer to p. 126.

Percussion group Drum kit

Note no. Perc group 1 Perc group 2 Perc group 3 Perc group 4 (General MIDI) (Other perc.) (Sound effects 1) (Sound effects 2)

Preset drum kit 150 (Trigger input jack)

23

27 28

29

31

33

35

30

32

34

24

26 25

39 40

41

43

45

47

42

44

46

36

38 37

51 52

53

55

57

59

54

56

58

48

50 49

63 64

65

67

66

68

60

62 61

C1

C2

C3

C4

22 OFF OFF OFF OFF

Ou! 808Clavs TB Bass 78 Cowbl

WahGtDw1 808Cwbl1 BsSlide 78 Guiro

WahGtUp1 808Clap RvsBSlid 78 Marcs

OFF OFF OFF OFF

Hi-Q ConcrtBD Gt Slide 78 MBeat

MtlNoise Roll S RvsGtSld 78 Tmbrn

WahGtDw2 Timpani GtScrach 808CongH

WahGtUp2 Timpani RvsGtScr 808CongM

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

CrsStk 5 CrsStk 4 808Crstk Click

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

Tambrn 1 Tambrn 3 Tambrn 2 TechTamb

OFF OFF OFF OFF

Cowbell1 Cowbell2 808Cwbl2 CowblDuo

OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

Pop RdX BongoHMt AirDrive Bucket

BongoHOp BongoHOp Burt TrashCan

BongoLOp BongoLOp Biwa Hoo!

CongaHMt CongaHOp Boing1 ElecBird

CongaHOp CongaMMt RvsBoin1 Gun Shot

CongaLOp CongaMOp Boing2 Mystery

Timbal1H CongaMSl RvsBoin2 Monster

Timbal1L CongaLMt Bounce KnockDwn

Agogo H CongaLOp CarDoor TimeTrip

Agogo L CongaLSl CarHorn RvsKick1

7/HI-HAT Rim (Close)

7/HI-HAT Rim (Open)

11/AUX1

11/AUX1 Rim

12/AUX2

12/AUX2 Rim

1/KICK Rim

1/KICK

2/SNARE

6/TOM4 Rim

2/SNARE Rim

6/TOM4

7/HI-HAT (Close)

5/TOM3

7/HI-HAT (Pedal)

4/TOM2

7/HI-HAT (Open)

4/TOM2 Rim

3/TOM1

8/CRASH1

3/TOM1 Rim

10/RIDE

9/CRASH2 Rim

10/RIDE Rim

8/CRASH1 Rim

9/CRASH2

5/TOM3 Rim

Preset list

150

Percussion group Drum kit

* For preset drum kit instruments, note numbers are assigned to each trigger input jack.

* If the same note number is assigned to both a pad and instrument in a percussion group, the pad has priority and you will only hear the sound assigned to that pad.

Note no. Perc group 1 Perc group 2 Perc group 3 Perc group 4 (General MIDI) (Other perc.) (Sound effects 1) (Sound effects 2)

Preset drum kit 150 (Trigger input jack)

75 76

72

74 73

69

71 70

C5

77

79

81

83

78

80

82

84C6

87 88

86

89

91

93

90

92

85

CabasUp CabasUp Glass RvsSnr 2

Maracas CabasDwn Hammer RvsAnvil

WhislSht Castanet MtlNoise RvsChina

WhislLng VibraSlp MtlPhase RvsBelTr

GuiroSht GuiroSht Orch Hit Rvs Hi-Q

GiroLng1 GiroLng1 OnKey RvsMFaze

Claves GiroLng2 Punch RvsAirDr

WdBlockH CuicaLow TapeStop Count 1

WdBlockL CuicaOpn RvsTStop Count 2

CuicaMt1 CuicaMt1 TechTamb Count 3

CuicaOpn CuicaMt2 TechNoiz Count 4

TringlMt TablaNa Barrel Count 5

TringlOp TablaTin Ou! Count 6

Shaker TablaTun Ou! Up Count 7

Sleibell TablaTe Nope! Count 8

BellTree BayaGe BrsFall1 Count 9

Castanet BayaKa BrsFall4 Count 10

SurdoLMt BayaGin Chord 1 Count 11

SurdoLOp BayaSl Chord 2 Count 12

CongaHSl Kalimba SlapBass Count 13

BayaKa Marimba TB Bass CountAnd

BayaGe BendGong RvsKick2 Count E

PandroMt TinyGong RvsSnr 1 Count A

PandroOp Gong RvsTom Count Ti

PandroSl TemplBel RvsCrash Count Ta

Preset list

151

A p p en

d ic

es

Backing inst list

No. Display Inst name No. Display Inst name

1 Ac.Piano Ac. Piano

2 E.Piano E.Piano

3 FM+SA EP FM+SA EP

4 60's EP 60's EP

5 St.FM EP St.FM EP

6 Br.FM EP Bright FM EP

7 Clav. Clav.

8 Celesta Celesta

9 Glcknspl Glockenspiel

10 Vibraphn Vibraphone

11 Marimba Marimba

12 Xylophon Xylophone

13 Tublrbel Tubular-bells

14 Organ 1 Organ 1 (Even Bar)

15 Organ 2 Organ 2

16 Nylon Gt Nylon Guitar

17 Steel Gt Steel Guitar

18 Jazz Gt Jazz Guitar

19 Clean Gt Clean Guitar

20 ChorusGt Chorus Guitar

21 Muted Gt Muted Guitar

22 Pop Gt Pop Guitar

23 Funk Gt Funk Guitar

24 OvrdrvGt Overdrive Guitar

25 Heavy Gt Heavy Guitar

26 MutDstGt Muted Distortion Guitar

27 RokRhytm Rock Rhythm

28 Wah Gt Wah Guitar

29 Aco.Bass Acoustic Bass

30 El.Ac.Bs Electric Acoustic Bass

31 FingerBs Fingered Bass

32 FunkBass Funk Bass

33 PickBass Pick Bass

34 MutPikBs Muted Pick Bass

35 FrtlesBs Fretless Bass

36 SlapBass Slap Bass

37 Saw Bass Saw Bass

38 TB303 Bs TB303 Bass

39 SH101 Bs SH101 Bass

40 Syn.Str. Synth Strings

41 OB Str. OB Strings

42 Brass 1 Brass 1

43 Brass 2 Brass 2

44 Syn. Brs Synth Brass

45 Poly Brs Poly Brass

46 TenorSax Tenor Sax

47 Flute Flute

48 Saw Wave Saw Wave

49 Calliope Synth Calliope

50 Fantasia Fantasia

51 ThickPad Thick Pad

52 80'sPoly 80's Poly Synth

53 Kalimba Kalimba

54 SteelDrm Steel Drums

Preset list

152

Preset pattern list

No. Pattern name Tempo Length Play type No. Pattern name Tempo Length Play type

1 Drums 120 6 Loop

2 SlowR 72 4 Loop

3 Sfl'R 120 4 Loop

4 FunkyHR 100 2 Loop

5 SpeedHR 236 4 Loop

6 8bt'R 140 4 Loop

7 16bt'R 112 4 Loop

8 16bt'Bld 75 4 Loop

9 C'Rock 106 12 Loop

10 Blues 55 8 Loop

11 Swing 130 12 Loop

12 BigBand 140 4 Loop

13 JzWaltz 160 4 Loop

14 UKacid 86 4 Loop

15 GngRap 90 4 Loop

16 T Groove 100 4 Loop

17 Funky 105 4 Loop

18 JazzFunk 125 4 Loop

19 S.Soul 154 4 Loop

20 PopShfl 114 8 Loop

21 Fusion 120 12 Loop

22 TechFsn 106 4 Loop

23 Fsn in 5 140 3 Loop

24 N.J.S. 107 4 Loop

25 House 113 4 Loop

26 HipHop 91 4 Loop

27 Techno 140 4 Loop

28 Jungle 170 4 Loop

29 Latin 125 8 Loop

30 Bossa 74 8 Loop

31 Songo 109 4 Loop

32 Samba 110 2 Loop

33 Salsa 108 4 Loop

34 Reggae 132 8 Loop

35 Ska 132 4 Loop

36 PercLoop 120 8 Loop

37 JzIntro 140 3 One Shot

38 JzFnkBrk 125 2 One Shot

39 RockBrk 120 1 One Shot

40 FunkyBrk 105 1 One Shot

41 PercFill 120 1 One Shot

42 DrumFill 240 2 One Shot

43 Kickin16 128 1 One Shot

44 BrsSect 140 2 Tap

45 FunkHit 112 1 Tap

46 PianoRun 120 1 Tap

47 Chord 120 2 Tap

48 BassLine 120 1 Tap

49 PercTap 120 8 Tap

50 SfxTap 60 2 Tap

Preset list

153

A p p en

d ic

es

Section 1. Receive data

Channel Voice Messages

* Following Channel Voice Messages can be recorded in SETUP MIDI TX/RX Channel.

Note Off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH vvH 9nH kkH 00H

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = note off velocity: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)

* In the Drum part, ignored This message. * The Velocity Values of Note Off message are ignored. * When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.

Note On Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = note on velocity: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)

* A channel which is assigned to the drum part will receive only the note numbers which are specified by the drum kit or the percussion group.

* When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.

Polyphonic Key Pressure Status 2nd byte 3rd byte AnH kkH vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = Value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* A channel which is assigned to the drum part will receive only the note numbers which are specified by the drum kit.

* If the value is greater than 40H (64), the decay of the note sounded by the received note number will be shortened.

* Not recorded in the sequencer.

Control Change

Modulation (Controller number 1) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 01H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Modulation depth: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* Only the channel assigned to the drum part can be received. * If the SETUP MIDI CTRL settings Pedal CC or Zone CC are set to MODULATION, the

effect will apply to the specified parameter. * During recording, this will be recorded in the sequencer data as Pedal Ctrl Chg data or

Zone Ctrl Chg data.

Foot Control (Controller number 4) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 04H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* Only the channel assigned to the drum part can be received. * The effect will be obtained when SETUP MIDI CTRL Pedal CC is set to FOOT CON-

TROL. * When recording, this will be recorded as Pedal Ctrl Chg data in the sequencer data

itself.

Data Entry MSB (Controller number 6) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 06H mmH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) mm = Control value: 00H - 18H (0 - 24semitone) Initial value = 02H (2 semitone)

* If RPN was previously specified as 00H 00H (Pitch Bend Sensitivity), you can specify the pitch bend sensitivity. This can be specified in semitone steps up to a maximum of 2 octaves. (Refer to the RPN item.)

* In the Drum part, ignored This message. * Not recorded in the sequencer.

Volume (Controller number 7) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Volume: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)

* Volume messages are used to adjust the volume balance of each track. * Not recorded in the sequencer.

Pan (Controller number 10) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 0AH vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = pan: 00H - 40H - 7FH (Left - Center - Right)

* In the Drum part, ignored This message. * Not recorded in the sequencer.

General purpose controller 1 (Controller number 16) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 10H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* Only the channel assigned to the drum part can be received. * If the SETUP MIDI CTRL settings Pedal CC or Zone CC are set to General Purpose

Controller 1, the effect will apply to the specified parameter. * During recording, this will be recorded in the sequencer data as Pedal Ctrl Chg data or

Zone Ctrl Chg data.

General purpose controller 2 (Controller number 17) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 10H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* Only the channel assigned to the drum part can be received. * If the SETUP MIDI CTRL settings Pedal CC or Zone CC are set to General Purpose

Controller 2, the effect will apply to the specified parameter. * During recording, this will be recorded in the sequencer data as Pedal Ctrl Chg data or

Zone Ctrl Chg data.

Hold 1 (Controller number 64) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON

* In the Drum part, ignored This message. * When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.

MIDI Implimentation

154

May. 1 1997 Model TD-10 Version 1.00

RPN MSB/LSB (Controller number 100, 101) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H llH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) mm = upper byte of parameter number specified by RPN ll = lower byte of parameter number specified by RPN

* In the Drum part, ignored This message. * The value specified by RPN will not be reset even by messages such as Program Change

or Reset All Controller. * Not recorded in the sequencer.

RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Explanation 00H 00H mmH - Pitch Bend Sensitivity

mm: 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones) Initial Value = 02H (2 semitones) ll: ignored (processed as 00H) specify up to 2 octaves in semitone steps

7FH 7FH - - RPN null set condition where RPN and NRPN are unspecified. The data entry messages after set RPN null will be ignored. (No Data entry messages are required after RPN null). Settings already made will not change. mm,ll: ignored

Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH

1. Drum Part n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) pp = Program number: 00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)

2. Part 1, Part 2, Bass Part n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) pp = Program number: 00H - 35H (prog.1 - prog.54)

* The sound will change beginning with the next note-on after the program change is received. Voices which were already sounding before the program change was received will not be affected.

* Not recorded in the sequencer.

Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH llH mmH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) mm,ll = Pitch Bend value: 00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-8192 - 0 - +8191)

Initial value = 40H 00H (Center)

* When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.

Channel Mode Messages

All Sounds Off (Controller number 120) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H 00H

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)

* When this message is received, all currently-sounding notes on the corresponding chan- nel will be silenced. However, the status of channel messages will not change.

* When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.

Reset All Controllers (Controller number 121) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H 00H

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)

* When this message is received, the following controllers will be set to their reset val- ues.When recording, a control message carrying the reset value will be created and recorded.

Controller Reset value Pitch Bend Change +/-0 (center) Modulation 0 (off)(When set to Ctr Chg.) Foot Control 0 (off)(When set to Ctr Chg.) General Purpose Controller 1 0 (off)(When set to Ctr Chg.) General Purpose Controller 2 0 (off)(When set to Ctr Chg.) Hold 1 0 (off) RPN unset; previously set data will not change

All Notes Off (Controller number 123) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7BH 00H

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)

* When All Notes Off is received, all notes on the corresponding channel will be turned off. However if Hold 1 is ON, the sound will be continued until these are turned off.

* In the recording mode, Note OFF message will be created for corresponding Note ON message, and will be recorded.

OMNI OFF (Controller number 124) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7CH 00H

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)

* The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.

l OMNI ON (Controller number 125) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7DH 00H

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)

* OMNI ON is only recognized as All notes off.

MONO (Controller number 126) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7EH mmH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) mm = mono number: 00H - 10H (0 - 16)

* The same processing will be carried out as when All Sound Off or All Notes Off is received.

POLY (Controller number 127) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7FH 00H

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)

* The same processing will be carried out as when All Sound Off or All Notes Off is received.

System Common Messages

Song Select

Status 2nd byte F3H ppH

pp = Pattern Number: 00H-63H (PATTERN01-PATTERN100)

* Reception does not take place when the Sync Mode for PATTERN GLOBAL is set to Internal or MIDI Delay.

* This is recognized only in Pattern Play when playback is stopped. * Not recorded in the sequencer.

MIDI implementation

155

A p p en

d ic

es

System Realtime Message

* Following System Realtime Messages cannot be recorded in recording mode.

Timing Clock Status F8H

* Recognized only when the Sync Mode of the Pattern Global is set at AUTO, EXT or MIDI DELAY.

Start Status FAH

* Recognized only when the Sync Mode of the Pattern Global is set at AUTO, EXT or REMOTE.

Continue Status FBH

* Recognized only when the Sync Mode of the Pattern Global is set at AUTO, EXT or REMOTE.

Stop Status FCH

* Recognized only when the Sync Mode of the Pattern Global is set at AUTO, EXT or REMOTE.

Active Sensing Status FEH

* When Active Sensing is received, the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all fur- ther messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages exceeds about 420 ms, the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received, and message interval monitoring will be halted.

System Exclusive Message

* Following System Exclusive Messages cannot be recorded.

Status Data byte Status F0H iiH, ddH, ......,eeH F7H

F0H: System Exclusive Message status ii = ID number: an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose

Exclusive message this is. Rolands manufacturer ID is 41H. ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard; Universal Non-realtime Messages (7EH) and Universal Realtime Messages (7FH).

dd,...,ee = data: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

The System Exclusive Messages received by the TD-10 are; Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Messages, Data Requests (RQ1), and Data Set (DT1).

Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Messages

Inquiry request Status Data byte Status F0H 7EH, dev, 06H, 01H F7H

Byte Explanation F0H Exclusive status 7EH ID number (universal non-realtime message) dev Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH (1 - 32) Initial value is 10H (17)) 06H,01H Inquiry request F7H EOX (End Of Exclusive)

* Even if the Device ID is 7FH (Broadcast), Inquiry Reply message will be transmitted. * When Inquiry Request is received, Inquiry Reply message will be transmitted.

Data transmission TD-10 can transmit and receive the various parameters using System Exclusive messages. The exclusive message of TD-10s data has a model ID of 00H 0AH and a device ID of 10H (17). Device ID can be changed in TD-10.

Request data 1 RQ1 (11H) This message requests the other device to send data. The Address and Size determine the type and amount of data to be sent. When a Data Request message is received, if the device is ready to transmit data and if the address and size are appropriate, the requested data will be transmitted as a Data Set 1 (DT1) message. If not, nothing will be transmitted.

Status Data byte Status F0H 41H, dev, 00H, 0AH, 11H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, F7H

ssH, ttH, uuH, vvH, sum

Byte Explanation F0H Exclusive status 41H ID number (Roland) dev Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH Initial value is 10H (17)) 00H 0AH Model ID (TD-10) 11H Command ID (RQ1) aaH Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the requested data bbH Address 2nd : 2nd byte of the starting address of the requested data ccH Address 3rd : 3rd byte of the starting address of the requested data ddH Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the requested data ssH Size MSB ttH Size 2nd uuH Size 3rd uuH Size LSB sum Checksum F7H EOX (End Of Exclusive)

* The amount of data that can be transmitted at once time will depend on the type of data, and data must be requested using a specific starting address and size. Refer to the Address and Size listed in Parameter Dump Request (Page 158).

* Regarding the checksum please refer to Page 163.

Data set 1 DT1 (12H) This is the message that actually performs data transmission, and is used when you wish to transmit the data.

Status Data byte Status F0H 41H, dev, 00H, 0AH, 12H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, F7H

eeh,... ffH, sum

Byte Explanation F0H Exclusive status 41H ID number (Roland) dev Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH Initial value is 10H)) 00H 0AH Model ID (TD-10) 12H Command ID (DT1) aaH Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the transmitted data bbH Address 2nd : 2nd byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ccH Address 3rd: 3rd byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ddH Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted data eeH Data: the actual data to be transmitted. Multiple bytes of data are transmitted

starting from the address. : : ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX (End Of Exclusive)

* The amount of data that can be transmitted at once time will depend on the type of data, and data must be requested using a specific starting address and size. Refer to the Address and Size listed in Parameter Dump Request (Page 158).

* If Data Set 1 is transmitted successively, there must be an interval of at least 45 ms. * Regarding the checksum please refer to Page 163.

MIDI implementation

156

Section 2. Transmit data

Channel Voice Messages

* The following channel voice messages are transmitted on the channel specified as the SETUP MIDI TX/RX Channel.

Note off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = Note off velocity: 40H (64) fixed

Note on Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = note on velocity: 01H - 7FH (1 - 127)

* On the channel assigned to the drum part, the note numbers specified by the drum kit or the percussion group will be transmitted.

Polyphonic key pressure Status 2nd byte 3rd byte AnH kkH vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) kk = note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) vv = value: 00H, 7FH (0, 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* On the channel assigned to the drum part, 7FH will be transmitted when the rim of the pad is pressed and 00H when the rim is released, for the note number specified for the pad and rim.

Control Change

Modulation (Controller number 1) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 01H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Modulation depth: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* This is transmitted only on the channel which is assigned to the drum part. * If the SETUP MIDI CTRL settings Pedal CC or Zone CC are set to MODULATION, the

specified parameter will be transmitted.

Foot control (Controller number 4) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 04H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* This is transmitted only on the channel which is assigned to the drum part. * This will be transmitted if the SETUP MIDI CTRL setting Pedal CC is set to FOOT CON-

TROL.

Data entry MSB Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 06H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)

* When a pattern is selected, the sequencers pitch bend sensitivity value will be transmit- ted.

Volume (Controller number 7) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Volume: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)

* When a pattern is selected, the Part Level of the sequencer pattern data will be transmit- ted.

Pan (Controller number 10) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 0AH vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = pan: 00H - 40H - 7FH (Left - Center - Right)

* When a pattern is selected, the Pan of the sequencer pattern data will be transmitted.

General purpose controller 1 (Controller number 16) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 10H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* This is transmitted only on the channel which is assigned to the drum part. * This will be transmitted if the SETUP MIDI CTRL settings Pedal CC or Zone CC are set

to General Purpose Controller 1.

General purpose controller 2 (Controller number 17) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 11H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) Initial value = 00H (0)

* This is transmitted only on the channel which is assigned to the drum part. * This will be transmitted if the SETUP MIDI CTRL settings Pedal CC or Zone CC are set

to General Purpose Controller 2.

Hold 1 (Controller number 64) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0-63 = OFF 64-127 = ON

* Transmitted only when the TD-10 is in play for Pattern in which Hold 1 is recorded.

RPN MSB/LSB (Controller number 100,101) Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H llH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) mm = upper byte of parameter number specified by RPN ll = lower byte of parameter number specified by RPN

* When a pattern is selected, the sequencers pitch bend sensitivity value will be transmit- ted.

RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Explanation 00H 00H mmH - Pitch Bend Sensitivity

mm: 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones) Initial Value = 02H (2 semitones) ll: ignored (processed as 00H) specify up to 2 octaves in semitone steps

7FH 7FH - RPN null set condition where RPN and NRPN are unspecified. The data entry messages after set RPN null will be ignored. (No Data entry messages are required after RPN null). Settings already made will not change. mm,ll: ignored

MIDI implementation

157

A p p en

d ic

es

Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) pp = Program number: 00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)

* When a drum kit is selected, or when a pattern is selected, the pattern number of the sequencer pattern data will be transmitted.

Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH llH mmH

n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16) mm,ll = Pitch Bend value: 00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-8192 - 0 - +8191)

* Transmitted only when the TD-10 is in play for Pattern in which Pitch Bend Change is recorded.

System Common Messages

Song Position Pointer Status 2nd byte 3rd byte F2H llH mmH

mm,ll = Song Position: F00 00H - 7F 7FH(0 - 16383)

Song Select Status 2nd byte F3H ppH

pp = Pattern number: 00H-63H (PATTERN1-PATTERN100)

* When a pattern is selected, the song select number will be transmitted.

System Realtime Message

Timing Clock Status F8H

Start Status FAH

Continue Status FBH

Stop Status FCH

Active sensing Status FEH

* This will be transmitted constantly at intervals of approximately 250ms.

System exclusive messages

Inquiry reply and Data Set 1 (DT1) are the only System Exclusive messages transmitted by TD-10. When an appropriate Inquiry Request or Data Request 1 (RQ1) message is received, the requested internal data will be transmitted.

Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Messages

Inquiry reply Status Data byte Status F0H 7EH, dev, 06H, 02H,41H,0AH,01H,00H,00H,00H, F7H

06H,00H,00H

Byte Explanation F0H Exclusive status 7EH ID number (universal non-realtime message) dev Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH (1 - 32) Initial value is 10H (17)) 06H 02H Inquiry reply 41H ID number(Roland) 0AH 01H Device family code 00H 00H Device family number code 00H 02H 00H 00H software revision level F7H EOX (End Of Exclusive)

* When Inquiry Request (P. 156)is received, Inquiry Reply message will be transmitted.

Data set 1 DT1 (12H) Status Data byte Status F0H 41H, dev, 00H, 0AH, 12H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, F7H

eeH,... ffH, sum

Byte Explanation F0H Exclusive status 41H ID number (Roland) dev Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH Initial value is 10H) 00H 0AH Model ID (TD-10) 12H Command ID (DT1) aaH Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address 2nd: 2nd byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address 3rd: 3rd byte of the starting address of the data to be sent. ddH Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent. eeH Data: the actual data to be sent. Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in

order starting from the address. : : ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX (End Of Exclusive)

* The amount of data that can be transmitted at once time will depend on the type of data, and data must be requested using a specific starting address and size. Refer to the Address and Size listed in 3.Parameter address map (Page 159).

* Data larger than 128 bytes must be divided into packets of 128 bytes or less. If Data Set 1 is transmitted successively, there must be an interval of at least 40 ms between pack- ets.

* Regarding the checksum please refer to Page 163.

Bulk Dump

Bulk Dump allows you to transmit a large amount of data at once, and is convenient for storing settings for the entire unit on a computer or sequencer. For Bulk Dump Request, you must use the Address and Size listed in the following Bulk Dump Request.

Bulk Dump Request

Address(H) Size(H) 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (ALL Patterns: dump request for all user pattern (51-100)) 40 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 (SETUP: ) 41 nn 00 00 00 01 00 00 (DRUM KIT:) 44 pp 16 00 00 00 48 00 (PERCUSSION GROUP:)

mm = 01-32H (Pattern No.51-100) nn = 00-31H (Drum Kit No.1-50) pp = 00-03H (Perc Group No.1-4)

* Request for ALL PATTERNS and SET UP are correspond to Bulk Dump parameter ( [SETUP]-[F2(MIDI)]-[F4(BULK)]).

* Data of preset pattern (No.1-50) cannot be transmitted.

MIDI implementation

158

3. Parameter address map (Model ID = 00H 0AH) This map indicates address, size, Data (range), Parameter, and Description of parameters which can be transferred using Data set 1 (DT1). All the numbers of address, size, Data, and Default Value are indicated in 7-bit Hexadecimal-form.

Addresses marked at # cannot be used as starting addresses.

Parameter Address Block

TD-10 (Model ID = 00H 0AH) ++ | Start | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 00 00 | SETUP (Individual) *1-1| |+| | 01 00 00 00 | DRUM KIT 1 (Individual) *1-2| | : | | | 01 31 00 00 | DRUM KIT 50 (Individual) *1-2| |+| | 04 00 00 00 | PERCUSSION GROUP 1 (Individual) *1-3| | : | | | 04 03 00 00 | PERCUSSION GROUP 4 (Individual) *1-3| |+| | 10 00 00 00 | PATTERN (Bulk) *1-4| |+| | 40 00 00 00 | SETUP (Bulk) *1-1| |+| | 41 00 00 00 | DRUM KIT 1 (Bulk) *1-2| | : | | | 41 31 00 00 | DRUM KIT 50 (Bulk) *1-2| |+| | 44 00 00 00 | PERCUSSION GROUP 1 (Bulk) *1-3| | : | | | 44 03 00 00 | PERCUSSION GROUP 4 (Bulk) *1-3| ++

* 1-1 SETUP ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 00 | TRIGGER BANK 1 *1-1-1| | : | | | 00 30 00 | TRIGGER BANK 4 *1-1-1| |+| | 01 00 00 | DRUM KIT CHAIN 1 (Name) *1-1-2| | : | : | | 01 0F 00 | DRUM KIT CHAIN 16 (Name) *1-1-2| |+| | 02 00 00 | DRUM KIT CHAIN 1 (Step) *1-1-3| | : | : | | 02 0F 00 | DRUM KIT CHAIN 16 (Step) *1-1-3| |+| | 03 00 00 | MIDI *1-1-4| |+| | 04 00 00 | PROGRAM CHANGE MAP *1-1-5| |+| | 05 00 00 | CONTROL *1-1-6| |+| | 06 00 00 | MASTER EQ *1-1-7| |+| | 07 00 00 | MASTER TUNE *1-1-8| ++

* 1-1-1 TRIGGER BANK ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 | Pad parameters (1/KICK) *1-1-1-1| | : | : | | 0B 00 | Pad parameters (12/AUX2) *1-1-1-1| ++

* 1-1-1-1 TRIGGER BANK (Pad parameters) ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 | 0000 aaaa | Trigger Type 0 - 15 | | | | (PD5,PD7,PD9,10A,10B,12A,12B,P 1,P 2, | | | | KD7,K 1,K 2,KIK,SNR,TOM,FLR) | |++| | 01 | 0000 0aaa | Head Tension Adjustment 0 - 1 | | | | (Loose,Normal,Tight) | | | | (2/SNARE only) | |++| | 02 | 000a aaaa | Rim Sensitivity 0 - 15 | | | | (OFF, 1 - 15) | | | | (2/SNARE only) | |++| | 03 | 0000 aaaa | STICK | Sensitivity 0 - 15 | | | | | (1 - 16) | | 04 | 0000 aaaa | STICK | Threshold 0 - 15 | | 05 | 0000 0aaa | STICK | Sens Curve 0 - 7 | | | | | (Linear,EXP1,EXP2,LOG1,LOG2,Spline, | | | | | Loud1,Loud2) | |+++| | 06 | 00aa aaaa | STICK | Scan Time 0 - 40 | | | | | (0.0ms - 4.0ms, 0.1ms step) | | 07 | 0000 aaaa | STICK | Retrigger Cancel 0 - 15 | | | | | (1 - 16) |

| 08 | 000a aaaa | STICK | Mask Time 0 - 16 | | | | | (0ms - 64ms, 4ms step) | | 09 | 0000 0aaa | STICK | Crosstalk 0 - 6 | | | | | (OFF,30,40,50,60,70,80) | |+++| | 0A | 0000 aaaa | BRUSH | Sensitivity 0 - 15 | | | | | (1 - 16) | | 0B | 0000 aaaa | BRUSH | Threshold 0 - 15 | | 0C | 0000 0aaa | BRUSH | Sens Curve 0 - 7 | | | | | (Linear,EXP1,EXP2,LOG1,LOG2,Spline, | | | | | Loud1,Loud2) | |+++| | 0D | 00aa aaaa | BRUSH | Scan Time 0 - 40 | | | | | (0.0ms - 4.0ms, 0.1ms step) | | 0E | 0000 aaaa | BRUSH | Retrigger Cancel 0 - 15 | | | | | (1 - 16) | | 0F | 000a aaaa | BRUSH | Mask Time 0 - 16 | | | | | (0ms - 64ms, 4ms step) | | 10 | 0000 0aaa | BRUSH | Crosstalk 0 - 6 | | | | | (OFF,30,40,50,60,70,80) | |+| | Total size | 00 00 00 11 | ++

* 1-1-2 DRUM KIT CHAIN (Name) +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Offset | | | address | Description | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | 00 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit CHAIN Name 32 - 127 | |# 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit CHAIN Name 32 - 127 | | : | : | | |# 07 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit CHAIN Name 32 - 127 | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | Total size | 00 00 00 08 | +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+

* 1-1-3 DRUM KIT CHAIN (Step) +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Offset | | | address | Description | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | 00 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Number (Step1) 0 - 50 | | | | (1-50, END) | |# 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Number (Step2) 0 - 50 | | | | (1-50, END) | | : | : | | |# 1F | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Number (Step32) 0 - 50 | | | | (1-50, END) | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | Total size | 00 00 00 20 | +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+

* 1-1-4 MIDI ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 | 000a aaaa | MIDI Channel (DRUM) 0 - 16 | | | | (1 - 16,OFF) | | 00 01 | 000a aaaa | MIDI Channel (PART1) 0 - 16 | | | | (1 - 16,OFF) | | 00 02 | 000a aaaa | MIDI Channel (PART2) 0 - 16 | | | | (1 - 16,OFF) | | 00 03 | 000a aaaa | MIDI Channel (BASS) 0 - 16 | | | | (1 - 16,OFF) | |++| | 00 04 | 0000 00aa | Zone CC (2/SNARE) 0 - 3 | | | | (OFF,Modulation(1),General1(16), | | | | GENERAL2(17)) | | 00 05 | 0000 00aa | Zone CC (10/RIDE) 0 - 3 | | | | (OFF,Modulation(1),General1(16), | | | | General2(17)) | | 00 06 | 0000 0aaa | Pedal CC 0 - 4 | | | | (OFF,Modulation(1),Foot Ctrl(4), | | | | General1(16),General2(17)) | |++| | 00 07 | 0000 000a | Program Change Rx SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 08 | 0000 000a | Program Change Tx SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | |++| | 00 09 | 0000 000a | Local Control 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 0A | 0000 000a | Soft Through 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 0B | 0000 000a | Note Chase 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 0C | 0000 00aa | Pedal Data Thin 0 - 2 | | | | (OFF,1,2) | |+| | Total size | 00 00 00 0D | ++

* 1-1-5 PROGRAM CHANGE MAP ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 | 0aaa aaaa | Program Change (DRUM KIT 1) 0 - 127 | | | | (1 - 128) | | : | | | | 00 31 | 0aaa aaaa | Program Change (DRUM KIT 50) 0 - 127 | | | | (1 - 128) | |++| | Total size | 00 00 00 32 | ++

MIDI implementation

159

A p p en

d ic

es

* 1-1-6 CONTROL ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 | 0000 00aa | Foot SW Mode 0 - 2 (*1) | | 00 01 | 0000 0aaa | Pad SW Mode 0 - 4 (*2) | | 00 02 | 0000 aaaa | Display Contrast 0 - 15 | | | | (1 - 16) | | 00 03 | 0000 000a | Mix In Output 0 - 1 | | | | (Master,Phones Only) | | 00 04 | 0000 000a | Preview Dynamics 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 05 | 0aaa aaaa | Preview Velocity 1 - 127 | |+| | Total size | 00 00 00 06 | ++

(*1) Foot SW Mode [ SW1 ] [ SW2 ]

0 KIT SELECT KIT# DEC KIT# INC 1 PATTERN SEL PTN# DEC PTN# INC 2 PATTERN PLAY PTN# INC STOP/PLAY

(*2) Pad SW Mode [ AUX1 ] [ AUX2 ]

0 OFF OFF OFF 1 KIT SELECT OFF KIT# INC 2 PATTERN SEL OFF PTN# INC 3 KIT SELECT(2) KIT# DEC KIT# INC 4 PATTERN SEL(2) PTN# DEC PTN# INC

* 1-1-7 MASTER EQ ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 | 0000 aaaa | Low Frequency 0 - 14 | | | | (20Hz - 500Hz) | | 00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Low Gain 49 - 79 | | | | (-15db - +15db) | |++| | 00 02 | 000a aaaa | Mid Frequency 7 - 23 | | | | (100Hz - 4kHz) | | 00 03 | 0aaa aaaa | Mid Gain 49 - 79 | | | | (-15db - +15db) | | 00 04 | 000a aaaa | Mid Q 0 - 20 | | | | (0.5,1.0 - 20.0, 1.0step) | |++| | 00 05 | 000a aaaa | High Frequency 14 - 30 | | | | (500Hz - 20kHz) | | 00 06 | 0aaa aaaa | High Gain 49 - 79 | | | | (-15db - +15db) | |++| | 00 07 | 0000 000a | SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | |+| | Total size | 00 00 00 08 | ++

* 1-1-8 MASTER TUNE ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 | 0000 aaaa | Master Tune 0 - 509 | |# 01 | 0000 bbbb | (415.3 - 466.2Hz) | |# 02 | 0000 cccc | | |# 03 | 0000 dddd | | |+| | Total size | 00 00 00 04 | ++

* 1-2 DRUM KIT ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 00 | Common parameters *1-2-1| | 01 00 | Pad parameters (1/KICK) *1-2-2| | 02 00 | Pad parameters (2/SNARE) *1-2-2| | 03 00 | Pad parameters (3/TOM1) *1-2-2| | 04 00 | Pad parameters (4/TOM2) *1-2-2| | 05 00 | Pad parameters (5/TOM3) *1-2-2| | 06 00 | Pad parameters (6/TOM4) *1-2-2| | 07 00 | Pad parameters (7/HIHAT) *1-2-2| | 08 00 | Pad parameters (8/CRASH1) *1-2-2| | 09 00 | Pad parameters (9/CRASH2) *1-2-2| | 0A 00 | Pad parameters (10/RIDE) *1-2-2| | 0B 00 | Pad parameters (11/AUX1) *1-2-2| | 0C 00 | Pad parameters (12/AUX2) *1-2-2| ++

* 1-2-1 DRUM KIT (Common parameters) +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Offset | | | address | Description | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | 00 00 00 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Name 1 32 - 127 | |# 00 00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Name 2 32 - 127 | | : | | | |# 00 00 07 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Name 8 32 - 127 | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | 00 00 08 | 0000 00aa | PERCUSSION GROUP Assign 0 - 3 | | | | (1 - 4 ) | +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+

| 00 00 09 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ingnored) | |++| | 00 00 0A | 0aaa aaaa | GROUP VOLUME (DRUMS) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 0B | 0aaa aaaa | GROUP VOLUME (PERC) 0 - 127 | |++| | 00 00 0C | 0aaa aaaa | AMBIENCE Group Send Level (DRUMS) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 0D | 0aaa aaaa | AMBIENCE Group Send Level (PERC) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 0E | 0aaa aaaa | AMBIENCE Group Send Level (PART) 0 - 127 | |++| | 00 00 0F | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Group Send Level (DRUMS) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 10 | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Group Send Level (PERC) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 11 | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Group Send Level (PART) 0 - 127 | |++| | 00 00 12 | 0aaa aaaa | AMBIENCE Output Level (MASTER) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 13 | 0aaa aaaa | AMBIENCE Output Level (DIR1) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 14 | 0aaa aaaa | AMBIENCE Output Level (DIR2) 0 - 127 | | 00 00 15 | 0aaa aaaa | AMBIENCE Output Level (DIR3) 0 - 127 | |++| | 00 00 16 | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Output Level 0 - 127 | |++| | 00 00 17 | 0000 000a | AMBIENCE SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 00 18 | 0000 000a | EFFECT SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 00 19 | 0000 000a | COMP SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 00 00 1A | 0000 000a | EQ SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | |++| | 00 00 1B | 0000 aaaa | AMBIENCE Type 0 - 9 | | | | (Beach, Living Room, Bath Room, | | | | Studio, Garage, Locker Room, | | | | Theater, Cave, Gymnasium, | | | | Dome Stadium) | | 00 00 1C | 0000 0aaa | AMBIENCE Room Size 0 - 4 | | | | (Tiny, Small, Medium, Large, Huge) | | 00 00 1D | 0000 00aa | AMBIENCE Wall Type 0 - 2 | | | | (Wood, Plaster, Glass) | | 00 00 1E | 0000 000a | AMBIENCE Mic Position 0 - 1 | | | | (Low, High) | |++| | 00 00 1F | 000a aaaa | EFFECT Type 0 - 29 | | 00 00 20 | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Param 1 0 - 127 | | 00 00 21 | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Param 2 0 - 127 | | 00 00 22 | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Param 3 0 - 127 | | 00 00 23 | 0aaa aaaa | EFFECT Param 4 0 - 127 | |++| | 00 00 24 | 0000 000a | Stick Type 0 - 1 | | | | (Sticks, Brushes) | |++| | Total size | 00 00 00 25 | ++

* 1-2-2 DRUM KIT (Pad parameters) ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 | 0000 aaaa | HEAD | Instrument 0 - 599 | |# 01 | 0000 bbbb | | (1 - 600) | |# 02 | 0000 cccc | | | |# 03 | 0000 dddd | | | |+++| | 04 | 0000 aaaa | HEAD | Pitch (Head Tuning) -480 - +480 | |# 05 | 0000 bbbb | | (-4800 - 4800cent, 10cent step) | |# 06 | 0000 cccc | | | |# 07 | 0000 dddd | | | |+++| | 08 | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Decay 33 - 95 | | | | | (-31 - +31) | | 09 | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Level 0 - 127 | | 0A | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Note number 0 - 127 | | 0B | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Ambience Send Level 0 - 127 | | 0C | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Effect Send Level 0 - 127 | | 0D | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Play Pattern number 0 - 100 | | | | | (OFF,1 - 100) | | 0E | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | MIDI Gate Time 1 - 80 | | | | | (0.1s - 8.0s, 0.1s step) | |+++| | 0F | 0000 aaaa | RIM | Instrument 0 - 599 | |# 10 | 0000 bbbb | | (1 - 600) | |# 11 | 0000 cccc | | | |# 12 | 0000 dddd | | | |+++| | 13 | 0000 aaaa | RIM | Pitch (Head Tuning) -480 - 480 | |# 14 | 0000 bbbb | | (-4800 - +4800cent, 10cent step) | |# 15 | 0000 cccc | | | |# 16 | 0000 dddd | | | |+++| | 17 | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Decay 33 - 95 | | | | | (-31 - +31) | | 18 | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Level 0 - 127 | | 19 | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Note number 0 - 127 | | 1A | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Ambience Send Level 0 - 127 | | 1B | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Effect Send Level 0 - 127 | | 1C | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Play Pattern number 0 - 100 | | | | | (OFF,1 - 100) | | 1D | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | MIDI Gate Time 1 - 80 | | | | | (0.1s - 8.0s, 0.1s step) | |++| | 1E | 000a aaaa | Pan 0 - 30 | | | | (L15 - R15) | | 1F | 0000 00aa | Output Assign 0 - 3 | | | | (MASTER,DIR1,DIR2,DIR3) | |++| | 20 | 0000 000a | Compressor SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 21 | 0aaa aaaa | Compressor Threshold 0 - 100 | | | | (-inf, -99db - 0db) | | 22 | 000a aaaa | Compressor Ratio 0 - 18 | | | | (1:1 - 9:1 (1step), | | | | 10:1 - 90:1 (10step), | | | | inf:1) | | 23 | 000a aaaa | Compressor Attack Time 0 - 31 | | | | (0.05 - 0.09 (0.01step), | | | | 0.1 - 0.9 (0.1step), | | | | 1.0 - 9.0 (1.0step), |

MIDI implementation

160

| | | 10.0 - 50.0 (5.0step)) | | 24 | 000a aaaa | Compressor Release Time 0 - 23 | | | | (0.05,0.07,0.1,0.5,1,5,10,17, | | | | 25,50,75,100,200,300,400,500, | | | | 600,700,800,900,1000,1200, | | | | 1500,2000 ms) | | 25 | 0aaa aaaa | Compressor Output Level 0 - 72 | | | | (-60 - +12db) | |++| | 26 | 0000 000a | EQ SW 0 - 1 | | | | (OFF,ON) | | 27 | 0000 00aa | EQ HIGH Type 0 - 2 | | | | (Peaking, L.Shelving, H.Shelving) | | 28 | 000a aaaa | EQ HIGH Frequency 0 - 30 | | | | (20,25,31.5,40,50,63,80,100,125, | | | | 160,200,250,315,400,500,630,800, | | | | 1k,1.25k,1.6k,2k,2.5k,3.15k,4k, | | | | 5k,6.3k,8k,10k,12.5k,16k,20k) | | 29 | 0aaa aaaa | EQ HIGH Gain 49 - 79 | | | | (-15 - +15db) | | 2A | 000a aaaa | EQ HIGH Q 0 - 20 | | | | (0.5,1.0 - 20.0, 0.1step) | | 2B | 0000 00aa | EQ LOW Type 0 - 2 | | | | (Peaking, L.Shelving, H.Shelving) | | 2C | 000a aaaa | EQ LOW Frequency 0 - 30 | | | | (20,25,31.5,40,50,63,80,100,125, | | | | 160,200,250,315,400,500,630,800, | | | | 1k,1.25k,1.6k,2k,2.5k,3.15k,4k, | | | | 5k,6.3k,8k,10k,12.5k,16k,20k) | | 2D | 0aaa aaaa | EQ LOW Gain 49 - 79 | | | | (-15 - +15db) | | 2E | 000a aaaa | EQ LOW Q 0 - 20 | | | | (0.5,1.0 - 20.0, 0.1step) | |++| | 2F | 0000 00aa | Mic Type 0 - 2 (*3) | | | | (1/KICK:Condenser,Dynamic1,Dynamic2) | | | | (2/SNARE:Condenser,Dynamic,Lo-Fi) | | 30 | 0000 00aa | Mic Position 0 - 2 (*4) | | | | (Outside,Standard,Inside) | |++| | 31 | 0aaa aaaa | (*5) | | 32 | 0aaa aaaa | (*5) | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | (*5) | | 34 | 0aaa aaaa | (*5) | | 35 | 0aaa aaaa | (*5) | | 36 | 0aaa aaaa | (*5) | |+| | Total size | 00 00 00 37 | ++

(*3) 1/KICK, 2/SNARE only (*4) 1/KICK, 2/SNARE, 3/TOM1, 4/TOM2, 5/TOM3, 6/TOM4 only (*5) 1/KICK, 2/SNARE, 3/TOM1, 4/TOM2, 5/TOM3, 6/TOM4 only

Depending on the instrument group of the assigned instruments, settings are as follows.

Instrument Group: V-KICK ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 00aa | Head Type 0 - 2 | | | | (Clear,Coated,PinStripe*) | | | PinStripe is a registered Trademark of Remo Inc. U.S.A. | | 32 | 0000 000a | Shell Depth 0 - 1 | | | | (Normal, Deep) | | 33 | 0000 0aaa | Muffling 0 - 4 | | | | (OFF,Tape1,Tape2,Blanket,Weight) | | 34 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 35 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: V-SNARE ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 00aa | Head Type 0 - 2 | | | | (Clear,Coated,PinStripe*) | | | PinStripe is a registered Trademark of Remo Inc. U.S.A. | | 32 | 000a aaaa | Shell Depth 0 - 38 | | | | (1.0 - 20.0, 0.5step) | | 33 | 0000 0aaa | Muffling 0 - 4 | | | | (OFF,Tape1,Tape2,Daughnuts1,Daughnuts2) | | 34 | 0000 00aa | Shell Material 0 - 2 | | | | (Wood,Steel,Brass) | | 35 | 0000 00aa | Strainer Adjustment 0 - 3 | | | | (OFF,Loose,Medium,Tight) | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: V-TOM ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 00aa | Head Type 0 - 2 | | | | (Clear,Coated,PinStripe*) | | | PinStripe is a registered Trademark of Remo Inc. U.S.A. | | 32 | 0000 000a | Shell Depth 0 - 1 | | | | (Normal, Deep) | | 33 | 0000 0aaa | Muffling 0 - 4 | | | | (OFF,Tape1,Tape2,Felt1,Felt2) | | 34 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 35 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: ELEC KICK, ELEC SNARE, ELEC TOM1 - ELEC TOM4 ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0aaa aaaa | Attack 0 - 127 | | 32 | 0aaa aaaa | Decay 0 - 127 | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | Noise 0 - 127 | | 34 | 0aaa aaaa | Tone 0 - 127 | | 35 | 0aaa aaaa | Bend 0 - 127 | | 36 | 0aaa aaaa | Balance 0 - 127 | ++

Instrument Group: TR808 KICK ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 32 | 0aaa aaaa | Decay 0 - 127 | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | Tune 0 - 127 | | 34 | 0aaa aaaa | Tone 0 - 127 | | 35 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: TR808 SNARE ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 32 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | Tune 0 - 127 | | 34 | 0aaa aaaa | Tone 0 - 127 | | 35 | 0aaa aaaa | Snappy 0 - 127 | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: TR808 TOM ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 32 | 0aaa aaaa | Decay 0 - 127 | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | Tune 0 - 127 | | 34 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 35 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: TR909 KICK ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0aaa aaaa | Attack 0 - 127 | | 32 | 0aaa aaaa | Decay 0 - 127 | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | Tune 0 - 127 | | 34 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 35 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: TR909 SNARE ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 32 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | Tune 0 - 127 | | 34 | 0aaa aaaa | Tone 0 - 127 | | 35 | 0aaa aaaa | Snappy 0 - 127 | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

Instrument Group: TR909 TOM ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 31 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 32 | 0aaa aaaa | Decay 0 - 127 | | 33 | 0aaa aaaa | Tune 0 - 127 | | 34 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 35 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | | 36 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored) | ++

* 1-3 PERCUSSION GROUP ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 16 00 | Note #22 (Note parameters) *1-3-1| | : | | | 5D 00 | Note #93 (Note parameters) *1-3-1| ++

MIDI implementation

161

A p p en

d ic

es

* 1-3-1 PERCUSSION GROUP (Note parameters) ++ | Offset | | | address | Description | |+| | 00 | 0000 aaaa | Instrument 0 - 599 | |# 01 | 0000 bbbb | (1 - 600) | |# 02 | 0000 cccc | | |# 03 | 0000 dddd | | |++| | 04 | 0000 aaaa | Pitch -480 - +480 | |# 05 | 0000 bbbb | (-4800 - +4800cent, 10cent step) | |# 06 | 0000 cccc | | |# 07 | 0000 dddd | | |++| | 08 | 0aaa aaaa | Volume 0 - 127 | | 09 | 000a aaaa | Pan 0 - 30 | | | | (L15 - R15) | | 0A | 0aaa aaaa | Decay 33 - 95 | | | | (-31 - +31) | | 0B | 0aaa aaaa | Ambience 0 - 127 | | 0C | 0aaa aaaa | Fx Send 0 - 127 | | 0D | 0000 00aa | Output 0 - 1 | | | | (MASTER,PHONES ONLY) | |+| | Total size | 00 00 00 0E | ++

* 1-4 PATTERN +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Offset | | | address | Description | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | 00 00 00 | All User Pattern Request | |-------------+---------------------------------------------------------| | 7F 7F 7F | User Pattern Data End | +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+

mm = User Pattern Number: 01H - 32H (Pattern No.51 - Pattern No.100)

* Data size should be 00 00 00 00. * Data of demo song and Preset patterns cannot be transmitted.

Parameter Address Block Map

An outlined address map of the Exclusive Communication is as follows;

Address(H) Block Sub block Reference =========== ============== ================================== ========== 00 00 00 00 ++....++....++....++

| SETUP | |TRIGGER BANK 1 | | Pad 1 | |*1-1-1-1| ++. ++. ++....++ : : . | : | . | : | : : . ++ . ++ : : . |TRIGGER BANK 4 | . | Pad 12 | : : . ++ .++ : : . ++..................++ : : . |KIT CHAIN 1 (Name)| | *1-1-2 | : : . ++..................++ : : . | : | : : . ++ : : . |KIT CHAIN16 (Name)| : : . ++ : : . ++....++....++ : : . |KIT CHAIN 1 (Step)| | Step 1 | | *1-1-3 | : : . ++. ++....++ : : . | : | . | : | : : . ++ . ++ : : . |KIT CHAIN16 (Step)| . | Step 32| : : . ++ .++ : : . ++..................++ : : . |MIDI | | *1-1-4 | : : . ++..................++ : : . ++..................++ : : . |PROGRAM CHANGE MAP| | *1-1-5 | : : . ++..................++ : : . ++..................++ : : . |CONTROL | | *1-1-6 | : : . ++..................++ : : . ++..................++ : : . |MASTER EQ | | *1-1-7 | : : . ++..................++ : : . ++..................++ : : . |MASTER TUNE | | *1-1-8 | : : .++..................++ : :

01 00 00 00 ++....++..................++ | DRUM KIT | | DRUM KIT 1 | | *1-2 | | | ++..................++ ++. | : | : : . ++ : : . | DRUM KIT 50 | : : .++ : : : : : : : :

04 00 00 00 ++....++....++....++ | PERCUSSION | |PERCUSSION GROUP 1| |Note #22| | *1-3 | | GROUP | ++. ++....++ ++. | : | . | : | : : . ++ . ++ : : . |PERCUSSION GROUP 4| . |Note #93| : : .++ .++ : : : : : :

10 00 00 00 ++........................ | PATTERN | ^ ++ | : : |

40 00 00 00 ++ | | SETUP | | ++ | : : |

41 00 00 00 ++ | | DRUM KIT | Bulk area ++ | : : |

44 00 00 00 ++ | | PERCUSSION | | | GROUP | v ++........................

MIDI implementation

162

Section 4. Supplementary material

Decimal and Hexadecimal table

In MIDI documentation, data values and addresses/sizes of exclusive messages etc. are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits. The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers.

++++++++++++ | Dec.| Hex.|| Dec.| Hex.|| Dec.| Hex.|| Dec.| Hex.| ++++++++++++ | 0 | 00H || 32 | 20H || 64 | 40H || 96 | 60H | | 1 | 01H || 33 | 21H || 65 | 41H || 97 | 61H | | 2 | 02H || 34 | 22H || 66 | 42H || 98 | 62H | | 3 | 03H || 35 | 23H || 67 | 43H || 99 | 63H | | 4 | 04H || 36 | 24H || 68 | 44H || 100 | 64H | | 5 | 05H || 37 | 25H || 69 | 45H || 101 | 65H | | 6 | 06H || 38 | 26H || 70 | 46H || 102 | 66H | | 7 | 07H || 39 | 27H || 71 | 47H || 103 | 67H | | 8 | 08H || 40 | 28H || 72 | 48H || 104 | 68H | | 9 | 09H || 41 | 29H || 73 | 49H || 105 | 69H | | 10 | 0AH || 42 | 2AH || 74 | 4AH || 106 | 6AH | | 11 | 0BH || 43 | 2BH || 75 | 4BH || 107 | 6BH | | 12 | 0CH || 44 | 2CH || 76 | 4CH || 108 | 6CH | | 13 | 0DH || 45 | 2DH || 77 | 4DH || 109 | 6DH | | 14 | 0EH || 46 | 2EH || 78 | 4EH || 110 | 6EH | | 15 | 0FH || 47 | 2FH || 79 | 4FH || 111 | 6FH | | 16 | 10H || 48 | 30H || 80 | 50H || 112 | 70H | | 17 | 11H || 49 | 31H || 81 | 51H || 113 | 71H | | 18 | 12H || 50 | 32H || 82 | 52H || 114 | 72H | | 19 | 13H || 51 | 33H || 83 | 53H || 115 | 73H | | 20 | 14H || 52 | 34H || 84 | 54H || 116 | 74H | | 21 | 15H || 53 | 35H || 85 | 55H || 117 | 75H | | 22 | 16H || 54 | 36H || 86 | 56H || 118 | 76H | | 23 | 17H || 55 | 37H || 87 | 57H || 119 | 77H | | 24 | 18H || 56 | 38H || 88 | 58H || 120 | 78H | | 25 | 19H || 57 | 39H || 89 | 59H || 121 | 79H | | 26 | 1AH || 58 | 3AH || 90 | 5AH || 122 | 7AH | | 27 | 1BH || 59 | 3BH || 91 | 5BH || 123 | 7BH | | 28 | 1CH || 60 | 3CH || 92 | 5CH || 124 | 7CH | | 29 | 1DH || 61 | 3DH || 93 | 5DH || 125 | 7DH | | 30 | 1EH || 62 | 3EH || 94 | 5EH || 126 | 7EH | | 31 | 1FH || 63 | 3FH || 95 | 5FH || 127 | 7FH | ++++++++++++

* Decimal values such as MIDI channel, bank select, and program change are listed as one(1) greater than the values given in the above table.

* A 7-bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps. For data where greater precision is required, we must use two or more bytes. For example, two hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7-bit bytes would indicate a value of aa x 128 + bb.

* In the case of values which have a +- sign, 00H = -64, 40H = +- 0, and 7FH = +63, so that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart. In the case of two types, 00 00H = -8192, 40 00H = +- 0, and 7F 7FH = +8191. For example if aa bbH were expressed as decimal, this would be aa bbH - 40 00H = aa x 128 + bb - 64 x 128.

What is the decimal expression of 5AH ? From the preceding table, 5AH = 90

What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H given

as hexadecimal for each 7 bits? From the preceding table, since 12H = 18 and 34H = 52 18 x 128 + 52 = 2356

Examples of actual MIDI message

92 3E 5F 9n is the Note-on status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since 2H = 2, 3EH = 62, and 5FH = 95, this is a Note-on message with MIDI CH = 3, note number 62 (note name is D4), and velocity 95.

C9 20 CnH is the Program Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since 9H = 9 and 20H = 32, this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH = 10, program number 33 (33 - SockHop).

EA 00 28 EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. The 2nd byte (00H=0) is the LSB and the 3rd byte (28H=40) is the MSB, but Pitch Bend Value is a signed number in which 40 00H ( = 64 x 128 + 0 = 8192) is 0, so this Pitch Bend Value is 28 00H - 40 00H = 40 x 128 + 0 - (64 x 128 + 0) = 5120 - 8192 = -3072

B3 64 00 65 00 06 0C 26 00 64 7F 65 7F BnH is the Control Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. For Control Changes, the 2nd byte is the control number, and the 3rd byte is the value. In a case in which two or more messages consecutive messages have the same status, MIDI has a pro- vision called running status which allows the status byte of the second and following messages to be omitted. Thus, the above messages have the following meaning.

(B3 64 00 MIDI ch.4, lower byte of RPN parameter number: 00H (B3) 65 00 (MIDI ch.4) upper byte of RPN parameter number: 00H (B3) 06 0C (MIDI ch.4) upper byte of parameter value: 0CH (B3) 26 00 (MIDI ch.4) lower byte of parameter value: 00H (B3) 64 7F (MIDI ch.4) lower byte of RPN parameter number: 7FH (B3) 65 7F (MIDI ch.4) upper byte of RPN parameter number: 7FH

In other words, the above messages specify a value of 0C 00H for RPN parameter number 00 00H on MIDI channel 4, and then set the RPN parameter number to 7F 7FH.

RPN parameter number 00 00H is Pitch Bend Sensitivity, and the MSB of the value indi- cates semitone units, so a value of 0CH = 12 sets the maximum pitch bend range to +- 12 semitones (1 octave). (On GS sound sources the LSB of Pitch Bend Sensitivity is ignored, but the LSB should be transmitted anyway (with a value of 0) so that operation will be cor- rect on any device.)

Once the parameter number has been specified for RPN or NRPN, all Data Entry messages transmitted on that same channel will be valid, so after the desired value has been trans- mitted, it is a good idea to set the parameter number to 7F 7FH to prevent accidents. This is the reason for the (B3) 64 7F (B3) 65 7F at the end.

It is not desirable for performance data (such as Standard MIDI File data) to contain many events with running status as given in . This is because if playback is halted during the song and then rewound or fast-forwarded, the sequencer may not be able to transmit the correct status, and the sound source will then misinterpret the data. Take care to give each event its own status.

It is also necessary that the RPN or NRPN parameter number setting and the value setting be done in the proper order. On some sequencers, events occurring in the same (or consec- utive) clock may be transmitted in an order different than the order in which they were received. For this reason it is a good idea to slightly skew the time of each event (about 1 tick for TPQN=96, and about 5 ticks for TPQN=480).

* TPQN : Ticks Per Quarter Note

Example of an Exclusive message and calculat- ing a Checksum

Roland Exclusive messages (RQ1, DT1) are transmitted with a checksum at the end (before F7) to make sure that the message was correctly received. The value of the checksum is determined by the address and data (or size) of the transmitted exclusive message.

How to calculate the checksum (hexadecimal numbers are indicated by H) The checksum is a value derived by adding the address, size and checksum itself and inverting the lower 7 bits. Heres an example of how the checksum is calculated. We will assume that in the exclusive message we are transmitting, the address is aa bb cc ddH and the data or size is ee ff gg hhH.

aa + bb + cc + dd + ee + ff + gg + hh = sum sum / 128 = quotient ... remainder 128 - remainder = checksum (However, the checksum will be 0 if the remainder is 0.)

Setting Shell depth of snare drum in drum kit 1 to 3.5. According to the Parameter Address Map, the Drumkit No.1 has an address of 01 00 00 00H, Trigger 2 has a offset address of 02 00H and Shell depth has a offset address of 32H. Thus,

01 00 00 00 02 00

+) 32 01 00 02 32

MIDI implementation

163

A p p en

d ic

es

and 3.5 is a value of 05,

F0 41 10 00 0A 12 01 00 02 32 05 ?? F7 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) address size checksum (6)

(1) Exclusive status (2) ID number (Roland) (3) Device ID (17) (4) Model ID (TD-10) (5) Command ID (DT1) (6) EOX

Next we calculate the checksum.

01H + 00H + 02H + 32H + 05H = 1 + 0 + 2 + 50 + 5= 58 (sum) 58 (sum)/128 = 0 (quotient) ... 58 (remainder) checksum = 128 - 58 (remainder) = 70 = 46H

This means that F0 41 10 00 0A 12 01 00 02 32 05 46 F7 is the message we transmit.

Requesting transmission of compressor swich of snare

drum in drum kit 1. According to the Parameter Address Map,the Drumkit No.1 has an address of 01 00 00 00H, Trigger 2 has a offset address of 02 00H and Compressor switch has a offset address of 20H. Thus,

01 00 00 00 02 00

+) 20 01 00 02 20

Since Size = 00 00 00 01H,

F0 41 10 00 0A 11 01 00 02 20 00 00 00 01 ?? F7 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) address size checksum (6)

(1) Exclusive status (2) ID number (Roland) (3) Device ID (17) (4) Model ID (TD-10) (5) Command ID (RQ1) (6) EOX

Next we calculate the checksum.

01H + 00H + 02H + 20H + 00H + 00H +00H + 01H = 1 + 0 + 2 + 32 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 = 36 (sum) 36 (sum) / 128 = 0 (quotient) ... 15 (remainder) checksum = 128 - 36 (remainder) = = 92 = 5CH

This means that F0 41 10 00 0A 11 01 00 02 20 00 00 00 01 5C F7 is the message we transmit.

MIDI implementation

164

Function...

Basic Channel

Mode

Note Number :

Velocity

After Touch

Pitch Bend

Control Change

Program Change

System Exclusive

System Common

System Real Time

Aux Message

Notes

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Default Changed

Default Messages Altered

True Voice

Note ON Note OFF

Key's Ch's

1 4 6 7

10 16 17 64

100, 101

: True #

: Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune

: Clock : Commands

: All sound off : Reset all controllers : Local ON/OFF : All Notes OFF : Active Sense : System Reset

116, OFF 116, OFF

MODE 3 X

O 9nH, v = 1127 O 8nH, v = 64

0127

O X

X

X O X X X O O X X

X X X X X X X X X

X **************

O

X X X

X X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X X

X

X

O

X X X

X X

X X X X X X

Modulation Foot control Data entry Volume Panpot General purpose controller 1 General purpose controller 2 Hold 1 RPN LSB, MSB

* 1 O X is selectable.

PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (TRIGGER SECTION)

Model TD-10

Date : May. 1, 1997

Version : 1.00MIDI Implementation Chart

**************

**************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes X : No

Memorized (Non-Volatile)

*1 *1

*1 *1

Only reception / transmission of Bulk Data.

MIDI implementation Chart

165

A p p en

d ic

es

Function...

Basic Channel

Mode

Note Number :

Velocity

After Touch

Pitch Bend

Control Change

Program Change

System Exclusive

System Common

System Real Time

Aux Message

Notes

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Default Changed

Default Messages Altered

True Voice

Note ON Note OFF

Key's Ch's

1 4 6 7

10 16 17 64

100, 101

: True #

: Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune

: Clock : Commands

: All sound off : Reset all controllers : Local ON/OFF : All Notes OFF : Active Sense : System Reset

X X

X X

X X

X

X X

X

X X X X X X X X X

X O O O O O O O O

O **************

O

X X X

X X

X X X X X X

116, OFF 116, OFF

MODE 3 X

O 9nH, v = 1127 O 8nH, v = 64

0127 0127

O X

O

O

O

X X X

X X

O O X O O X

Modulation Foot control Data entry Volume Panpot General purpose controller 1 General purpose controller 2 Hold 1 RPN LSB, MSB

* 1 O X is selectable. * 2 Drum part only. * 3 Backing part only.

PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (SOUND MODULE SECTION)

Model TD-10

Date : May. 1, 1997

Version : 1.00MIDI Implementation Chart

**************

**************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes X : No

Memorized (Non-Volatile)

*1, 2 *1, 2

*3 *1, 2 *1, 2 *3 *3

*3

(120 , 126, 127)

(123 -127)

Program Number Backing Part : 1-54 Drum Part : 1-128

MIDI implementation chart

166

Function...

Basic Channel

Mode

Note Number :

Velocity

After Touch

Pitch Bend

Control Change

Program Change

System Exclusive

System Common

System Real Time

Aux Message

Notes

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Default Changed

Default Messages Altered

True Voice

Note ON Note OFF

Key's Ch's

1 4 6 7

10 16 17 64

100, 101

: True #

: Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune

: Clock : Commands

: All sound off : Reset all controllers : Local ON/OFF : All Notes OFF : Active Sense : System Reset

116, OFF 116, OFF

MODE 3 X

O 9nH, v = 1127 O 8nH, v = 64

0-127

X X

O

X O O O O O O O O

X O X X X O O O X

O **************

O

O O X

O O

X X X X O X

116, OFF 116, OFF

X X

O 9nH, v = 1127 O 8nH, v = 64

0-127 0-127

X X

O

X

O (do not record)

X O X

X X

O O X O O X

Modulation Foot control Data entry Volume Panpot General purpose controller 1 General purpose controller 2 Hold 1 RPN LSB, MSB

* 1 O X is selectable. * 5 Drum part only. * 2 Only when pattern is selected. * 6 Backing part only. * 3 Receives when Sync Mode setting is External, Auto, or MIDIDELAY. * 4 Receives when Sync Mode setting is External, Auto, or Remote.

PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (SEQUENCER SECTION)

Model TD-10

Date : May. 1, 1997

Version : 1.00MIDI Implementation Chart

**************

**************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes X : No

Memorized (Non-Volatile)

*1, 5 *1, 5

*1, 5 *1, 5 *6 *6

*6

*4

*6

*1, *3 *1, *4

*1 *1

*2 *2 *1 *1

*2

(123 -127)

Program Number Backing Part : 1-54 Drum Part : 1-128

Only reception / transmission of Bulk Data.

MIDI implementation chart

167

A p p en

d ic

es

Sound Generator

Variable Drum Modeling

Maximum Polyphony 56 Voices

Instruments Drum Instruments: 600 Backing Instruments: 54

Drum Kits 50

Drum Kit Chains 16 chains (32 steps per chain)

Instrument Parameters Acoustic Drum: Shell material, Shell depth, Head type,

Head tuning, Muffling, Strainer adjust- ment

Electronic Drum: Attack, Tone pitch, Noise pitch, Decay, Noise tone balance, Pitch bend

TR-808, TR-909: Attack, Tune, Tone, Snappy, Decay Others: Pitch, Decay

Studio Parameters Studio types: 10 Room size, Wall type, Ambience mic position Mic type, Mic position

Mixer Parameters Volume, Pan, Output select

Compressor / Equalizer Compressor x 10 2-band parametric equalizer x 10 3-band master equalizer

Effect Types 30 Reverb (14 types)

Delay (4 types) Flanger Delay (2 types) Phaser Delay (2 types) Chorus Delay (2 types) Pitch shift delay (2 types) 3D-Delay (2 types) Flying 3D-Delay (2 types)

Note Number Map (Percussion Group) 4 Note Number Range: 2293

Trigger Parameters Trigger type (Scan time, Retrigger Cancel, Mask time, Crosstalk) Sensitivity, Threshold, Curve

Seqencer Preset Patterns: 50, User Patterns: 50 Tracks: 4 Play Function: One shot, Loop, Tap Resolution: 192 ticks per quarter note Recording Method: Real-time

Metronome Parameters Time Signature, Interval, Volume, Output select (Master/Phones only) Instruments: 16 (Voice counting, Click, Cowbell, etc.)

Tempo 20260

Display 64x160 dots backlit graphic LCD 8-segment, 3-character LED

Sliders 6 Kick, Snare, Hi-Hat, Others, Backing, Click

Preview Button 1 (touch sensitive)

Connectors Trigger Input jack (dual) x 12 Output jack x 8 (4 stereo pairs) Phones jack Monitor Mix In jack (Stereo) Hi-Hat control jack Footswitch jack (dual) MIDI Connector (IN, OUT/THRU) Expansion Board Slot Memory Card Slot

Output Separation: 76 dB (min.) (MASTER L -> DIRECT L, MASTER R -> DIRECT R): 45 dB (min.) (DIRECT L -> Other DIRECT L, DIRECT R -> Other DIRECT R): 45 dB (min.)

Nominal Output level +4 dBu (Audio Output)

Output Impedance 330 ohms

Power Supply AC 117 V, 230 V, 240 V

Power Consumption 18 W

Dimensions 305 (W) x 245 (D) x 90 (H) mm 12-1/16 (W) x 9-11/16 (D) x 3-9/16 (H) inches

Weight 2.3 kg / 5 lbs 2 oz

Accessories Owners manual, AC cord, Screws (M5 x 12) x 4

Options Wave & System Expansion Board (TDW-1) Pad (PD-120, PD-100, PD-80R, PD-80, PD-9, PD-7, PD-6) Cymbal (CY-15R, CY-14C, CY-12R/C, CY-12H, CY-6) Kick Trigger (KD-120, KD-80, KD-7) Hi-Hat Control Pedal (FD-7) Drum Stand (MDS-10, MDS-8, MDS-7U, MDS-6) Cymbal Mount (MDY-10U) Pad Mount (MDH-10U) Footswitch (BOSS: FS-5U) Memory Card (M-512E) Trigger MIDI Converter (TMC-6)

0dBu = 0.775Vrms

* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.

Specifications TD-10: Percussion Sound Module

168

Acoustic Drum This refers to conventional/acoustic drum sounds in the TD- 10, different of course from the Electronic sounds also avail- able.

Ambience This is the actual environment WHERE the drums are being played, with the possibility to change the size of the room, the wall materials and the positions of the ambience mikes.

Ambience Output Level This refers to the total level of ambience for the entire drum kit. Its similar to the return level of effect units routed back to a mixer.

Ambience Send Level This refers to the individual send level of each instrument to the ambience itself.

Append This is an editing function of the TD-10s sequencer, which joins or combines two patterns into one pattern.

AUX1, 2 jacks These are trigger input jacks for additional pads. Pads con- nected to these jacks can be used as pad switches for vari- ous functions as well as for triggering sounds, though the equalizer and compressor cannot be used with sounds trig- gered from these inputs.

Bulk Dump This is a function that transmits various types of TD-10 data from the MIDI OUT connector for storage or back up on an external device. To do so, you will need a MIDI cable and an external sequencer. This data can be only be used by the TD-10.

Chain Refer to Drum Kit Chain.

Choking This is a performance technique whereby, after a PD-7 or PD-9 has been hit, the edge of the pad is pinched by hand to mute the decay (length) of the triggered sound. (similar to choking a real cymbal by grabbing it)

Click This is the sound the metronome makes. It can be used as a stand alone tempo reference or when the sequencer is recording or playing back.

Compressor This is an effect unit found in all studios, used in controlling volume peaks to maintain a desired listening level. Its also used to change the tonal character and is an important tool in final sound finishing work.

Controller Controllers are devices which are used to input MIDI perfor- mance data, such as keyboards, guitar controllers, and pad controllers. (SPD-11/PAD-80 etc.)

CONTROL ROOM This is where youll find the mixing console, compressors, EQs and digital effects. Its one of the three key elements (instrument, studio, control room) which make up the TD- 10s operating structure.

Cursor This is the highlighted portion in the display, indicating the parameter being edited at that moment. Use the VALUE dial or [INC/DEC] to adjust the highlighted parameter.

DEC Button Each time this button is pressed, the on-screen value at the cursor location will decrease in steps of 1, useful when mak- ing fine adjustments. When making on/off settings, pressing this button will turn the setting OFF. If making large changes in the value of a setting,the VALUE dial is quicker.

Decay This parameter is used in sound editing , adjusting the decay time (length).

DIRECT 1, 2, 3 These jacks can be used for individual outputs (in stereo or mono) for more separation control or when using external effect devices, mixers etc. or for outputting just the ambience alone. Digital effects are output only from the MASTER out- puts.

Drum Kit The combination of all settings for instruments, studio,and control room are referred to as a drum kit.

Drum Kit Chain You can use the Drum Kit Chain function to create a sequence of up to 32 kits, allowing you use them in the desired order or preference.

Drum Trigger A drum trigger is a sensor attached directly on an acoustic drum, sending a signal that will trigger sounds from the TD- 10.

Glossary This section explains terms that appear in this owners manual.

169

A p p en

d ic

es

EDIT Editing is modifying a sound, effect, or musical data in the sequencer.

Effects The TD-10 has a variety of digital effects such as reverb, delay, flanger, chorus, and phaser.Its sometimes abbreviat- ed in the TD-10s display as FX.

Equalizer (EQ) An equalizer usually divides sound into high, mid & low frequency ranges, allowing their balance to be adjusted. The TD-10 provides 2-band equalizers for the instruments (not usable with instruments assigned to the AUX1, 2 jacks), and a 3-band equalizer for the total sound of the TD-10.

Expansion Board This is a board (optional) containing more instrumental sounds to be added to the TD-10, and is installed in the slot on the bottom panel.

FD-7 A hi-hat controller pedal.

Foot Switch A separately sold foot switch (BOSS FS-5U) can be used to select kits, and perform operations such as sequencer play- back/stop etc.

FS-5U A general-purpose pedal that can be used with the TD-10, and as a foot switch for other devices or instruments.

FX This is an abbreviation for EFFECTS, indicating the on board effects unit.

FX Send Level This adjusts the volume of the instrument sent to the effect unit.

Function Buttons These are the four buttons [F1][F2][F3][F4] located below the display. The function of these buttons will change depend- ing on whats in the screen, and the names of their current functions are shown in the bottom of the display.

Hi-Hat Control Pedal (FD-7) A pedal for controlling the hi-hat.

INC Button Each time this button is pressed, the on-screen value at the cursor location will increase in steps of 1, useful when mak- ing fine adjustments. When making on/off settings, pressing this button will turn the setting ON. If making large changes in the value of a setting, the VALUE dial is quicker.

Initialize This operation returns all settings to their factory values.

INST This refers to whole family of drum and percussion sounds. (In the case of parts used in a pattern,they are referred to with their actual names such as piano, guitar etc.)

KD-7 This is a Kick Trigger Unit. (ROLAND)

Kick Trigger Unit A kick drum triggering device.

M-512E A memory card that can be used with the TD-10, and other Roland instruments.

MASTER OUTPUT These jacks output all sounds as well as the TD-10s internal effects. (Except when using individual outputs of course)

MEMORY CARD An external storage media on which TD-10 drum kits or sequencer data can be saved. It is inserted into the memory card slot (MEMORY CARD) located on the rear panel of the TD-10. The TD-10 can use M-512E memory cards.

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) An international standard for allowing electronic musical instruments to communicate. Virtually all electronic musical instruments sold today support MIDI, allowing those instru- ments (even ones made by manufacturers other than Roland) to be used to play the TD-10. Pads connected to the TD-10 can also play external sound modules or samplers as well via MIDI.

MIDI connector These connectors are used to expand the TD-10s functionali- ty, such as synchronizing (the tempo) with other devices, to record performances, and to store data. Use a MIDI cable to connect other MIDI-compatible instruments or devices to the TD-10. MIDI connectors are used ONLY if you are using an external MIDI device.

Glossary

170

MIDI Soft Thru The MIDI OUT/THRU connector of the TD-10 normally functions as MIDI OUT. When the MIDI Soft Thru setting is turned on, messages received at MIDI IN will be re-transmit- ted from the OUT/THRU connector. System exclusive messages will not be transmitted.

MIX IN An external sound source or CD player can be connected to this jack, so that it can be monitored with the TD-10s sound from the MIX out and/or the headphone jack. (or sent to the headphone only-switchable) Use the [MIX IN] knob on the front panel to adjust the volume.

Muffling This is a technique in which the vibrations of a drum head are dampened with tape or other materials in order to adjust the overtones of the sound. On the TD-10 you can select var- ious types of muffling: unmuted, muting with tape, a ring mute, felt or a blanket. (depending on the choice of drum)

Note Number Every instrumental sound is assigned to a note of the key- board, including the drum sounds and the percussion groups.

Pad Switch This function allows a pad to be used for operations such as selecting drum kits, starting/stopping playback of the sequencer,etc.

Pad Pattern This function allows you to specify a pattern that will be played when a pad is struck even though hitting a pad nor- mally triggers a sound. With the TD-10 you can do both!

Parameter Shell Depth or Volume are examples of sound-related parameters. Tempo,and Measure length are examples of sequencer parameters. The process of modifying any parameter is referred to as editing.

Part Mute This function temporarily silences a part during sequencer playback.

Panpot This is the adjustment that determines the left/right place- ment of the sound in the stereo field. On the TD-10 the sound can be moved to left or right in 7 steps respectively.

Pattern In the sequencer, a pattern is a unit of performance data con- taining data for any one or all of the four parts (Part 1, Part 2, Bass part, Drum part).

PD-5 A single trigger pad - 8-3/4 inch (222 mm) diameter. No rim function.

PD-7 A dual trigger pad - 7-9/16 inch (192 mm) diameter. The head surface and rim send independent trigger signals.

PD-9 A dual trigger pad - 10 inch (254 mm) diameter. The head surface and rim send independent trigger signals.

PD-100 A single trigger pad - 11-13/16 inch (300 mm) diameter. The head is a unique mesh type material allowing perfor- mance with brushes. No rim function.

PD-120 A dual trigger pad - 13-13/16 inch (350 mm) diameter. The head is a unique mesh type material allowing perfor- mance with brushes. The head surface and rim send inde- pendent trigger signals.

Percussion Group When the TD-10 is triggered from an external MIDI con- troller source, (MIDI pad, sequencer or keyboard) 60 instru- ments are available in addition to the 12 instruments assigned to the pads. For each drum kit, you can assign any one of the 4 percussion groups.

Positional sensing When an acoustic drum is hit, the sound will differ depend- ing on whether it is played at the center of the head or towards the rim. The TD-10 gives you this capability by allowing the tone to change as the playing position changes, relative to the center or rim of the pad. (Snare drum or ride cymbal ONLY).

Preview The [PREVIEW] button on the TD-10s front panel lets you audition a sound as you edit even if no pads are connected. (Velocity sensitive)

Quick Play This is a playback function of the TD-10s sequencer that skips over any blank portion or pause at the beginning of sequence data so that playback begins immediately with the first MIDI event in the pattern.

Glossary

171

A p p en

d ic

es

Rim Shot A rim shot refers to striking the rim of a drum with a stick at the same time as hitting the head. Rim shots played with the TD-10 will trigger just the instrument assigned to the rim.

Recording In this owners manual, recording refers to recording a performance onto the sequencer, which only records the note number,velocity (force) and gate time(length- adjustable) of the strike. It does NOT record sound itself.

Reset Time This is a parameter in the sequencers Tap playback func- tion, and specifies the duration of time after which playback can resume.

Sequencer A sequencer is either a hardware-type device (such as MC- 50MKII etc) or musical software in a computer which records/plays back MIDI performances. Sequencers allow you to record using either a method referred to as realtime recording, (similar to conventional (audio) recording) or a method in which individual performance events are entered manually one after the other, (called step recording.) The TD-10s sequencer only provides realtime recording.

Simulation This means to imitate or copy something. The TD-10 is a sound module that simulates a set of drums and its sur- roundings.

Sound Module This is an electronic musical instrument containing sounds to be triggered by separate controllers (pad, keyboards, sequencer etc.) via MIDI. The TD-10 can also be used as a sound module.

STEP In a Drum Kit Chain, step refers to the order in which the drum kits are selected. Since up to 32 drum kits can be speci- fied, a chain of 32 steps can be created for recall.

STUDIO This is WHERE the drums are played and is one of the three main elements (instrument, studio,control room) in the TD- 10s sound producing structure. Here, the room itself can be modified (i.e. room size, wall material, ambience mic posi- tion) and the type and position of microphones on the instruments can also be selected.

Trigger When a pad is struck, a waveform of the vibration is output and transmitted to the sound module of the TD-10. This waveform is called the trigger signal. The trigger jacks on the rear panel receive these signals. The trigger indicator in the upper left of the panel indicates the reception status of the trigger signals.

VALUE Dial This dial provides a convenient way to make large changes in the value at the cursor location. For changing values in steps of 1, [INC/DEC] is easier.

V-drums System This refers to the drum system based on the TD-10,including the pads, pedals and rack.

V-EDIT This refers to the Variable Drum Modeling process which allows extensive editing parameters to be utilized. V-EDIT is available only for instruments supporting V-EDIT and only those assigned to trigger inputs 16.

V-SNARE, V-KICK, V-TOM These are instrument groups which allow V-EDIT. If you select one of these instruments for TRIGGER INPUT jacks 16, you will be able to perform V-EDIT operations (refer to p. 136).

Glossary

172

Here are the screen displays that will appear as a result of operations on the TD-10, in order of the buttons that are pressed. The page on which the main explanation for each display appears is listed, so you can refer to the appropriate page for details.

CHAINKIT

P.113P.79

P.126 P.79 P.78

P.116

P.116

P.78

P.78

Accoustic

INST

Electronic TR-808 TR-909

Trigger 1

Trigger 2

Trigger 36

P.80

P.122, 123

P.86

P.119P.80 V-EDIT EDIT

P.81 - P.85 V-EDIT

Trigger 16 (except V-EDIT) and Trigger 712

Index of screen displays

173

A p p en

d ic

es

STUDIO

P.87

P.88 P.87 P.87 P.88 P.89 P.88

CONTROL ROOM

P.91 P.92

P.90 P.90

P.96P.91

P.90 P.93, 96

P.93

SETUP

P.114 P.137

P.115 P.43

P.72, 120 P.108, 118

P.124

P.111, 112 P.31, 110

P.109P.108

P.115, 122, 124 P.121

P.128, 129 P.128 P.119 P.113

Index of screen displays

174

SEQUENCER

CLICK TEMPO

PART

REC Standby RECORDING

PATTERN

P.98 P.129

P.97, 101

P.107 P.107

P.107 P.107

P.106

P.107

P.97

P.106

P.103P.98

P.102 P.99 P.100 P.102 P.97

P.103106

Index of screen displays

175

A p p en

d ic

es

A ADVNCD ................................................................................111 Ambience...................................................................................87 Ambience (Percussion Group) .............................................127 Ambience Group Send ............................................................89 Ambience Mic ...........................................................................87 Ambience Output Level ..........................................................88 Ambience Send (Click) ..........................................................100 Ambience Send (Pad) ..............................................................88 Ambience Send (Part) ............................................................107 Append ....................................................................................106 Atk (Attack).........................................................................84, 85 Auto (SYNC) ...........................................................................129 AUX1, 2 Jack ...........................................................................119

B Backing INST ..................................................................101, 106 Bal (Balance)..............................................................................84 BANK (Trigger Bank) ......................................................29, 108 Basic (Trigger setting)............................................................109 Beat Delay............................................................................93, 94 Bend......................................................................................53, 84 Bend Range .............................................................................106 Brushes.................................................................................36, 50 Bulk Dump ..............................................................................121

C CARD.................................................................................17, 114 [CHAIN] ............................................................................70, 116 Chain Name ............................................................................116 Choking .....................................................................................35 Chorus Delay..................................................................93, 95 Clear pattern ...........................................................................105 [CLICK]..........................................................................73, 97, 99 Compressor ...............................................................................91 Control Change ..............................................................128, 129 [CONTROL ROOM] ....................................................47, 65, 90 Copy (TOOLS) ........................................................................117 Copy Pattern (Measure) ................................................104, 105 Count In ...................................................................................102 Crosstalk ..................................................................................112 [CURSOR]......................................................................15, 18, 97 Curve........................................................................................109

D Dcy (Decay) ...............................................................................84 [DEC]....................................................................................15, 19 Decay (INST).................................................................84, 85, 86 Decay (Percussion Group) ....................................................127 Delay ....................................................................................93, 94 Delete Pattern..........................................................................105 Demo..................................................................................28, 179

E Depth....................................................................................57, 82 Device ID .................................................................................122 DIRECT 1, 2, 3 Jack.............................................................16, 91 Display .....................................................................................113 Drum Kit........................................................................20, 38, 78 Drum Kit Chain ................................................................70, 116 Drum Kit List ......................................................................38, 78 Drum Trigger ............................................................33, 112, 142 EDIT ...........................................................................................81 EFFECT (Click) .......................................................................100 EFFECT (Drum Kit) .................................................................93 EFFECT SWITCH ...............................................................41, 79 EFFECT TYPE ...........................................................................93 Electronic Drum kit..................................................................52 EQ (Drum Kit) ....................................................................66, 92 EQ (Master) .............................................................................113 Erase Pattern ...........................................................................104 Error message .........................................................................138 [Exit] ...........................................................................................14 Expansion Board ......................................................................43 External ....................................................................................129

F Flanger Delay .................................................................93, 95 Flying 3D-Delay..................................................................93, 96 FOOT SWITCH...........................................................16, 72, 120 FREQ (EQ/Master) ................................................................113 FREQ (EQ/Pad)........................................................................92 Function Button ..................................................................14, 18 FX Send Level ...........................................................................90 FX Send (Group).......................................................................96 FX Send (Pad) ...........................................................................90 FX Send (Part) .........................................................................107 FX Send (Percussion Group).................................................127 FX SW...........................................................41, 51, 54, 62, 65, 79

G Gain (EQ/Master) ..................................................................113 Gain (EQ/Pad)..........................................................................92 Gate Reverb...............................................................................93 Gate time..................................................................................123 [Group Faders]........................................................15, 28, 37, 67 Group FX send..........................................................................96 Group Volume..........................................................................96

H Hall Reverb .........................................................................93, 94 Head .....................................................................................19, 77 Head Tension Adjustment ..............................................31, 110 Head Tuning .......................................................................59, 82 Head Type ...........................................................................58, 82

Index

176

Help....................................................................................42, 118 HH CTRL Jack ..........................................................................16 Hi-Hat Control Pedal...............................................36, 124, 128 Hit Pad Start............................................................................102

I [INC].....................................................................................15, 19 Initialize ...................................................................................137 [INST]...........................................................................55, 80, 136 INST (Backing Part) .......................................................106, 125 INST (Click).............................................................................100 INST (Percussion Group) ......................................................126 INST LIST ..................................................................................80 Internal.....................................................................................129 Interval.......................................................................................99

K Keyshift (Part) .........................................................................106 [KIT] .........................................................................15, 20, 38, 78

L LIST (Drum Kit)..................................................................38, 78 LIST (INST) ...............................................................................80 LIST (Pattern)............................................................................98 LIST (Percussion Group).......................................................126 Local Control...........................................................................124 Loop (Play) ................................................................................98 Loop (Recording)....................................................................102

M M-512E .....................................................................................114 MAS EQ (Master EQ).......................................................40, 113 MaskTime................................................................................112 [MASTER] .....................................................................15, 37, 45 MASTER OUTPUT Jack ....................................................16, 23 Master Tune ............................................................................106 Material ...............................................................................56, 81 MDS-10 ................................................................................22, 24 MDS-7U .....................................................................................22 Memory (Pattern) .....................................................................98 Memory Card..................................................................114, 115 Memory Card Protect ............................................................114 Memory Card Slot..............................................................16, 17 Mic Position.........................................................................87, 88 Mic Type ....................................................................................89 MIDI .................................................................................121, 140 MIDI Channel .................................................................124, 140 MIDI IN Jack .....................................................................16, 140 MIDI OUT/THRU Jack ...................................................16, 140 MIDI Delay .........................................................................129 [MIX IN].......................................................................16, 37, 108 MIX IN Output .......................................................................108

Muffling ...............................................................................60, 83 Mute (Part) ..............................................................................107

N NAME (Chain)........................................................................116 NAME (Drum Kit) ...................................................................78 NAME (Pattern)......................................................................103 Noi (Noise) ................................................................................84 Non Linear ..........................................................................93, 94 Note Chase ..............................................................................115 NOTE NO. (Pad) ............................................122, 125, 126, 127

O One Shot ....................................................................................98 Output (Click) .........................................................................100 Output (Pad) .............................................................................91 Output (Part)...........................................................................107 Output (Percussion Group) ..................................................127 Output Jack (DIRECT 13)......................................................16 Output Jack (MASTER) ...........................................................16

P PAD PATTERN ................................................................72, 119 PAD SWITCH .........................................................................119 Pan (Click) ...............................................................................100 Pan (Pad) ...................................................................................90 Pan (Part) .................................................................................107 Pan (Percussion Group).........................................................127 Parameter ................................................................................171 [PART] .......................................................................97, 101, 106 Part Mute .................................................................................107 Part Volume ............................................................................107 [PATTERN] ...........................................................68, 97, 98, 101 Pattern List ................................................................................98 PD-7..........................................................................24, 25, 35, 36 PD-9..........................................................................24, 25, 35, 36 PD-100......................................................................24, 30, 31, 36 PD-120................................................................24, 30, 31, 35, 36 Pedal CC ..................................................................................128 Pedal Data Thin ......................................................................124 Percussion Group...................................................................126 Phaser Delay...................................................................93, 95 [PHONES] .....................................................................15, 27, 37 PHONES Jack............................................................................16 Pitch (Pad) .................................................................................86 Pitch (Percussion Group) ......................................................127 Pitch Shift Delay .................................................................93, 95 Plate Reverb ........................................................................93, 94 [PLAY] .................................................................................68, 97 Play Type...................................................................................98 POLARITY ................................................................................25 Positional Sensing ............................................................36, 129 Preset Drum Kit ........................................................................20

Index

177

A p p en

d ic

es

Preset Pattern ............................................................................97 [PREVIEW]..................................................................15, 27, 118 Program Change.............................................................124, 128 PROTECT (Card)..............................................................17, 114

Q Q..........................................................................................92, 113 Quantize ..................................................................................103 Quick Play .................................................................................98

R [REC] ..................................................................................97, 102 Rec Mode .................................................................................102 Remote .....................................................................................129 Replace.....................................................................................102 Reset Time .................................................................................99 RetrigCancel............................................................................111 Return Level........................................................................93, 94 [RIM] ..............................................................................19, 20, 77 Rim Sensitivity........................................................................110 Rim Shot ....................................................................................35 Room Reverb.............................................................................93 Room Size ............................................................................64, 87

S ScanTime .................................................................................111 SELECT......................................................................................79 Sensitivity ..........................................................................39, 109 [SETUP]......................................................................................14 Shell Depth ..............................................................49, 57, 81, 82 Shell Material ......................................................................56, 81 Snappy .......................................................................................85 Soft Thru ..................................................................................123 SPD-11......................................................................................123 Step .....................................................................................70, 116 [STOP]........................................................................................97 Strainer Adj. ........................................................................61, 83 [STUDIO].................................................................15, 47, 63, 87 SYNC (MIDI)...........................................................................129 System Initialize .....................................................................137

T Tap..............................................................................................98 [TEMPO]......................................................................97, 99, 102 Threshold.................................................................................109 Time signature ..................................................................99, 101 Tone......................................................................................84, 85 [TOOLS].....................................................................................14 TR-808 ........................................................................................85 TR-909 ........................................................................................85 TRIGGER BANK ..............................................................29, 108 TRIGGER Indicator............................................................14, 45

Trigger Jack ...............................................................................24 TRIGGER TYPE ........................................................30, 108, 142 [TRIG SELECT]...................................................................15, 20 Tune (TR-808/909) ...................................................................85 Tuning..................................................................................59, 82 Type (Effect) ..............................................................................93 Type (EQ) ..................................................................................92 Type (Pad) .........................................................................30, 108 Type (Studio) ............................................................................87

U Undo.........................................................................................117

V [VALUE] .............................................................................15, 19 V-Basic Kit .................................................................................29 V-Drums System ......................................................................76 V-EDIT .......................................................................................81 V-Standard Kit ..........................................................................29 Volume (Drum Kit) ................................................................127 Volume (Pad) ......................................................................67, 90 Volume (Part)..........................................................................107 Volume (Percussion Group) .................................................127 Volume (Master).......................................................................15

W Wall Type ..................................................................................87

Z Zone CC...................................................................................129

Others 10A......................................................................................30, 108 10B ............................................................................................108 12A......................................................................................30, 108 12B ............................................................................................108 3D-Delay..............................................................................93, 95

Index

178

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment. This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.

For EU Countries

For EU Countries

Apparatus containing Lithium batteries

ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.

VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.

ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruks joner.

VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

For Canada

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada.

NOTICE

AVIS

179

About demo song Song title Composer Copyright Rainbow Roland Corporation 1997, Roland Corporation

Information When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below.

As of April 1, 2003 (Roland)

ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S.A. Av.Santa Fe 2055 (1123) Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL: (011) 4508-2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL TEL: (011) 4615 5666

MEXICO Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v. Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F. MEXICO TEL: (55) 5668-6699

PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A. Boulevard Andrews, Albrook, Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA TEL: 315-0101

U. S. A. Roland Corporation U.S. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938, U. S. A. TEL: (323) 890 3700

VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C.A. Av. Francisco de Miranda, Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL: (212) 285-8586

AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty., Ltd. 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West. NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL: (02) 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd. 32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden, Auckland, NEW ZEALAND TEL: (09) 3098 715

HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. Service Division 22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen Wan, New Territories, HONG KONG TEL: 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd. 409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road, Mumbai-400011, INDIA TEL: (022) 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL: (021) 6324170

MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA TEL: (03) 2144-3333

PHILIPPINES G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc. 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue Makati, Metro Manila 1200, PHILIPPINES TEL: (02) 899 9801

SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive, SINGAPORE 387381 TEL: 6846-3676

TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, R.O.C. TEL: (02) 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co. , Ltd. 330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2, Bangkok 10100, THAILAND TEL: (02) 2248821

BAHRAIN Moon Stores No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue, P.O.Box 247, Manama 304, State of BAHRAIN TEL: 211 005

VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St., District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL: (08) 844-4068

JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St., Amman 1118, JORDAN TEL: (06) 464-1200

KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est. Abdullah Salem Street, Safat, KUWAIT TEL: 243-6399 LEBANON Chahine S.A.L. Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857 Beirut, LEBANON TEL: (01) 20-1441

QATAR Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio & Stores) P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR TEL: 4423-554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar, SAUDI ARABIA

P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL: (03) 898 2081

TURKEY Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No:74/20 Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY TEL: (0212) 2499324 U.A.E. Zak Electronics & Musical Instruments Co. L.L.C. Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg., No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E. TEL: (04) 3360715

EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street, ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis, Cairo 11341, EGYPT TEL: 20-2-417-1828 REUNION Maison FO - YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann, Chaudron - BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex, REUNION ISLAND TEL: (0262) 218-429

SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop (PTY) Ltd. 11 Melle St., Braamfontein, Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA

P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017 Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (011) 403 4105

Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd. 17 Werdmuller Centre, Main Road, Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA

P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (021) 674 4030

CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd. 17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia, CYPRUS TEL: (022) 66-9426

DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A/S Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880, DK-2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL: 3916 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK, Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St. Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL: 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As, Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND TEL: (0)9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt, GERMANY TEL: (040) 52 60090

GREECE STOLLAS S.A. Music Sound Light 155, New National Road Patras 26442, GREECE TEL: 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd. Warehouse Area DEPO Pf.83 H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY TEL: (23) 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House, Belmont Court, Donnybrook, Dublin 4. Republic of IRELAND TEL: (01) 2603501

ITALY Roland Italy S. p. A. Viale delle Industrie 8, 20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY TEL: (02) 937-78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd. Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL: 2273 0074 POLAND P. P. H. Brzostowicz UL. Gibraltarska 4. PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL: (022) 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio, Roland Portugal, S.A. Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto 4050-465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL: (022) 608 00 60

RUSSIA MuTek 3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l 107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA TEL: (095) 169 5043

SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espaa, S. A. Calle Bolivia 239, 08020 Barcelona, SPAIN TEL: (93) 308 1000

SWITZERLAND Roland (Switzerland) AG Landstrasse 5, Postfach, CH-4452 Itingen, SWITZERLAND TEL: (061) 927-8383

SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A/S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL: (0)8 702 00 20

UKRAINE TIC-TAC Mira Str. 19/108 P.O. Box 180 295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE TEL: (03131) 414-40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland (U.K.) Ltd. Atlantic Close, Swansea Enterprise Park, SWANSEA SA7 9FJ, UNITED KINGDOM TEL: (01792) 702701

KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho-Dong, Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA TEL: (02) 3486-8855

AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES.M.B.H. Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74, A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA TEL: (0512) 26 44 260 BELGIUM/HOLLAND/ LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N. V. Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel (Westerlo) BELGIUM TEL: (014) 575811

AFRICA

CHILE Comercial Fancy S.A. Rut.: 96.919.420-1 Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor Santiago - Centro, CHILE TEL: (02) 688-9540

URUGUAY Todo Musica S.A. Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C.P.: 11.800 Montevideo, URUGUAY TEL: (02) 924-2335

EUROPE

AUSTRALIA/ NEW ZEALAND

ASIA

CENTRAL/LATIN AMERICA

NORTH AMERICA

MIDDLE EAST

EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo , Edificio No.4010 San Salvador, EL SALVADOR TEL: 262-0788

ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1, RO-4200 Gheorghehi TEL: (095) 169-5043

PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL: (021) 492-124

COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237, San Jose, COSTA RICA TEL: 258-0211

CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E, #02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980 TEL: 6243-9555

IRAN MOCO, INC. No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave., Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran, IRAN TEL: (021) 285-4169

ISRAEL Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons Ltd. 8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St. Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL TEL: (03) 6823666

SYRIA Technical Light & Sound Center Khaled Ebn Al Walid St. Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520, Damascus, SYRIA TEL: (011) 223-5384

CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd. (Head Office) 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL: (604) 270 6626

Roland Canada Music Ltd. (Toronto Office) 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL: (905) 362 9707

CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd. 5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai, CHINA TEL: (021) 5580-0800

Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd. (BEIJING OFFICE) 10F. No.18 Anhuaxili Chaoyang District, Beijing, CHINA TEL: (010) 6426-5050

01127534 '03-5-GN

For KD-120 and Non-Expanded TD-10 Owners

Before using the KD-120, you need to follow the steps below to make the appropriate settings for the TD-10. However, these settings won't be necessary if your TD-10 has been upgraded by means of the TDW-1.

Should you neglect to make the appropriate settings for the TD-10, you could likely experience the following problems:

Sometimes the kick drum does not sound (uneven volume) The volume of kick drum is too small (reduced sensitivity)

Procedure * Do not strike any pads or step on any pedals (except the KD-120) until the following settings are complete.

1. Press the [SETUP] button. The SETUP MENU screen appears.

2. Press the [F1 (TRIG)] button. The TRIGGER BASIC screen appears.

3. Use the [TRIG SELECT] buttons to select the pad being used for the kick. The upper right of the display will show H1 [KICK].

4. Use the [CURSOR] buttons and [VALUE] dial to modify the values of the settings so they match those in the screen depicted at right.

5. Press the [F1 (BANK)] button. The TRIGGER BANK screen appears.

6. Using the [CURSOR] buttons and [VALUE] dial, change the setting so it matches that shown at right (K 2).

7. Press the [F3 (ADVNCD)] button. The TRIGGER ADVANCED screen appears.

8. Use the [CURSOR] buttons and [VALUE] dial to modify the values of the settings so they match those shown at right.

This completes the settings you need to make for the TD-10. 40343345 2*RAD

If you experience any of the above-mentioned problems even after youve made the correct settings, try adjusting the head tension and mounting the kick pedal, as described in the following.

Adjusting the head tension Head tension that is too loose may cause problems. Adjust the head tension according to the following procedure.

Procedure

1. Loosen all six lock nuts.

2. Using a tuning key, loosen the tuning bolts until a slight gap is produced.

3. Tighten all tuning bolts by hand, as tightly as you can.

4. Using the tuning key, turn the tuning bolts a half to a full revolution each, thus tightening them. Tighten each tuning bolt one by one, observing the numerical order shown at right.

5. Tighten all lock nuts to prevent loosening of the tuning bolts.

This completes the head tension adjustment.

Notes concerning installation of the kick pedal on the KD-120.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the TD-10 Roland works, you can view and download the Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Roland TD-10 as well as other Roland manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Roland TD-10. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Roland TD-10 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.